JP2010162242A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To make the cost of manufacturing low by minimizing the work necessary to attach a transparent protection plate for protecting a shutter member. <P>SOLUTION: The shutter member, which moves between a position to shut a display space and a position to open the display space, is disposed in a base frame body 502 which demarcates the display space to make a display surface of a symbol display device visible from the front side. Right and left shutter storing members 507 and 508 of the base frame body 502 have stepped parts 528 composed of stepped surfaces 528a one stage lower in the rear and side walls erected along the end edges of the stepped surfaces 528a. The transparent protection plate 609, which covers the display space from the front side, is disposed in the front side of the stepped surfaces 528a and 528a of the shutter storing members 507 and 508 in such a way that the both ends abut to the protection plate. The transparent protection plate 609 is positioned between the shutter storing members 507 and 508 by inserting positioning projections formed on both right and left ends into insertion holes formed on the side walls. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  In the present invention, a symbol display device is disposed on the back side of the back unit disposed on the back side of the transparent plate, and the display portion of the symbol display device is disposed on the front side through the opening of the back unit and the through hole of the transparent plate. The present invention relates to a gaming machine configured so as to be visually recognized.

A pachinko machine, which is a typical gaming machine, has a frame-shaped decorative member arranged at a substantially central position of a game area defined on a board surface of a gaming board set in the machine. A symbol display device such as a drum or the like is faced, and the symbol display device is configured to perform a game effect such as a symbol combination game or a reach effect. Further, a visual effect is provided by disposing a movable effect device provided with a movable body that performs a required operation on the decorative member, and operating the movable body in accordance with a game effect performed by the symbol display device. Pachinko machines that improve the effect and enhance the fun of the game are also known. For example, a shutter device as a movable effect device disclosed in Patent Document 1 includes two shutter members that operate on the front side of the symbol display device, and both shutter members are operated by driving of a drive motor to The production effect is improved by shielding or opening the display unit.
In the pachinko machine of Patent Document 1, a center accessory (decorative member) on which a shutter device is disposed has a front display frame in which a front window is formed at a position facing the front surface of the symbol display device, and a shutter device. By combining the rear display frame on the back side of the front display frame attached from the front side to the display device opening of the game board, the center accessory is attached to the game board. Configured to be attached. A transparent member for protecting the symbol display device and the shutter device is disposed on the back side of the front display frame.

JP 2006-304953 A

Since many parts such as various light emitting devices and members forming warp routes are arranged around the front window portion of the front display frame, a boss, a positioning pin, etc. for positioning and fixing these parts are provided. Many positioning and fixing means are also formed. For this reason, the positioning and fixing means for fixing the transparent member to the front display frame must be provided at a position avoiding the positioning and fixing means of other components, and the shape of the transparent member itself is correspondingly complicated. The difficulty of increasing the production cost is pointed out.
Further, when a transparent member is disposed on the back side of the front display frame, the rear projection size of the front display frame is increased by the thickness of the transparent member, and when the transparent member is assembled with the rear display frame, It was necessary to process the rear display frame so as not to interfere. That is, in the case where a transparent member is provided on the front display frame, not only the positioning and fixing means are provided on the front display frame, but also the rear display frame needs to be processed, resulting in increased manufacturing costs. Yes.
That is, the present invention has been proposed to solve this problem in view of the above-described problems inherent in gaming machines according to the prior art, and is necessary for attaching a transparent protective plate for protecting the shutter member. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can keep the manufacturing cost low while minimizing the processing.

In order to overcome the above-mentioned problems and achieve the intended purpose, the invention according to claim 1 of the present application provides:
A game board (30) having a transparent plate (31) provided with a game area (32) on the front side and a back unit (50) attached to the back side of the transparent plate (31), the back unit (50) On the back side, a symbol display device (19) capable of variably displaying various symbols is disposed, and an opening (52a) formed in the back unit (50) and a penetration formed in the transparent plate (31) In the gaming machine configured to be able to visually recognize the display unit (19a) of the symbol display device (19) from the front side through the mouth (31a),
Arranged on the back unit (50), facing the opening (52a) of the back unit (50) and the through-hole (31a) of the transparent plate (31), the symbol display device (19) A base frame (502) that defines a display space (501) that allows the display section (19a) of the
Upper and lower rails that constitute upper and lower frame portions in the base frame body (502), and rail grooves (513, 514, 515, 522, 523, 524) extending in the left-right direction are respectively formed on opposing surfaces that vertically oppose across the display space (501) Members (505,506),
A shutter member (503) disposed on the base frame (502) so as to be movable along the upper and lower rail grooves (513, 514, 515, 522, 523, 524) and capable of shielding the display space (501);
Actuating means (504) for moving the shutter member (503) between a shielding position for shielding the display space (501) and an open position for opening the display space (501);
The left and right frame portions of the base frame body (502) constitute a shutter housing member (507, 508) for housing at least one shutter member (503) moved to the open position on the rear side,
A step surface (528a) formed on the display space (501) side on the front surface of the shutter housing members (507, 508) and lowered one step rearward, and an edge spaced from the display space (501) on the step surface (528a) A step portion (528) consisting of a side wall (528b) rising along,
A plurality of insertion holes (528c) formed in the side wall (528b) of the stepped portion (528);
A transparent protective plate (609) that is disposed so that both ends abut against the front side of both step surfaces (528a, 528a) of the shutter housing member (507, 508) and covers the display space (501) from the front side;
Positioning protrusions that are formed on the left and right ends of the transparent protective plate (609) and are inserted through the insertion hole (528c) so as to be detachable and position the transparent protective plate (609) between the shutter housing members (507, 508). (610)
The transparent protective plate (609) is detachably fixed to the shutter housing member (507, 508) through the positioning protrusion (610).
According to the first aspect of the present invention, by forming the step portion and the insertion hole for positioning and fixing the transparent protective plate in the shutter housing member that houses the shutter member, in relation to the positioning and fixing means of other components, etc. The transparent protective plate does not need to have a complicated shape, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the transparent protective plate is disposed in contact with a stepped surface that is one step lower than the front surface of the shutter storage member, the transparent protective plate interferes with components located on the front side of the shutter storage member. It is not necessary to perform processing for preventing the manufacturing cost and the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

In the invention according to claim 2, the shutter member (503)
The display space (501) is composed of a plurality of left shielding plates (534, 535, 536) that can partially shield the left half of the display space (501) in a state where the plurality of left shielding plates (534, 535, 536) are connected to the left and right. A left shutter member (532) capable of shielding and opening the display space (501) in a state where a plurality of left shielding plates (534,535,536) overlap in the front-rear direction;
The display space (501) is composed of a plurality of right shielding plates (537, 538, 539) that can partially shield the display space (501), and the right half of the display space (501) is shielded in a state where a plurality of right shielding plates (537, 538, 539) are connected to the left and right. And a right shutter member (533) that opens the display space (501) in a state where a plurality of right shielding plates (537, 538, 539) overlap in the front-rear direction,
The actuating means (504)
Left operating means for moving the left shutter member (532) between an open position stored on the rear side of the left shutter storage member (507) and a shielding position for shielding the left half of the display space (501) ( 558)
Right actuating means for moving the right shutter member (533) between an open position accommodated on the rear side of the right shutter accommodating member (508) and a shield position that shields the right half of the display space (501) ( 559).
According to the invention of claim 2, the shutter member that shields the display space is composed of a plurality of left shielding plates and shields the left half, and is composed of a plurality of right shielding plates and the right half. The front and rear dimensions of the storage space required on the rear side of the corresponding shutter storage member can be reduced when the shutter plate of each shutter member is overlapped in the front and rear direction. Can be made smaller. That is, even if a step portion is formed in each shutter storage member, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage space required behind the step portion.

In the invention according to claim 3, at the shielding position of the left and right shutter members (532, 533), the left shielding plate (536) located on the rightmost side of the left shutter member (532) and the leftmost side of the right shutter member (533). The right shielding plate (539) positioned at the center of the display space (501) in the left-right direction, and faces the back side of the opening (52a) of the back unit (50) by both shutter members (532,533). The symbol display device (19) covers the entire display portion (19a) of the symbol display device (19) and faces the back side of the opening (52a) of the back unit (50) at the open position of the left and right shutter members (532, 533). ) Is configured to open the entire display unit (19a).
According to invention of Claim 3, the display part of the symbol display apparatus which faces the back side of the opening part in a back unit can be entirely covered or opened as needed by the left and right shutter members.

In the invention according to claim 4, a frame-shaped decorative body (200) is disposed along the through hole (31a) of the transparent plate (31), and the left and right side rear ends of the frame-shaped decorative body (200) are arranged. The gist is that the portion (230,274) is housed in the step portion (528,528) of the shutter housing member (507,508).
According to the invention of claim 4, the side rear end portion of the frame-shaped decorative body arranged in the through hole of the transparent plate is configured to be accommodated in the step portion of the shutter accommodating member. The protrusion dimension to the back of the located base frame can be suppressed. In addition, since the step functions to attach the transparent protective plate, it is not necessary to separately form a part for accommodating the side rear end of the decorative member, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transparent protective plate can be positioned and fixed by using the shutter storage member, the processing points necessary for attaching the transparent protective plate are reduced, and the manufacturing cost is kept low. be able to.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine concerning an example. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on an Example. It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine which concerns on an Example in the state which removed the game board from the inner frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which concerns on an Example from the front side in the state which decomposed | disassembled the back unit and the transparent board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which concerns on an Example from the back side in the state which decomposed | disassembled the back unit and the transparent board. It is a vertical side view which shows the game board which concerns on an Example in the state which decomposed | disassembled the back unit and the transparent board, Comprising: The relationship between a game board and a ball tank is shown. It is the perspective view seen from the front side in the state which decomposed | disassembled the rail from the transparent plate which concerns on an Example. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the start prize apparatus and special prize apparatus which concern on an Example from the front side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the start prize apparatus and special prize apparatus which concern on an Example from the rear side It is. It is the perspective view seen from the front side in the state which decomposed | disassembled the transparent panel on either side from the back unit which concerns on an Example. It is a front view of the back unit concerning an example. It is a front view which shows the state which attached the LED board of the shutter apparatus and the light emission decoration apparatus to the back unit which concerns on an Example. It is a rear view of the game board concerning an example. It is explanatory drawing which shows the wiring connection relationship of the pachinko machine which concerns on an Example. It is the perspective view which looked at the frame-shaped ornament which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the frame-shaped decorative body which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is a front view of the rear frame member concerning an example. It is the principal part enlarged view which looked at the frame-shaped decorative body which concerns on an Example from the lower side. It is a rear view of the rear frame member which concerns on an Example. It is a principal part rear view of the frame-shaped ornament which concerns on an Example. It is a side view which shows the rear frame member which concerns on an Example. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows a mode that the attachment base which concerns on an Example is assembled | attached to a rear frame member. (a) is a front view of the front frame member which concerns on an Example, (b) is a rear view of the front frame member which concerns on an Example. It is a rear view of the frame-shaped ornament which concerns on an Example. It is a top view of the frame-shaped ornament which concerns on an Example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower frame which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a rear view of the lower frame decoration cover which concerns on an Example. (a) is a front view of the lower frame base member which concerns on an Example, (b) is a rear view of the lower frame base member which concerns on an Example. It is a vertical side view of the frame-shaped decorative body according to the example. (a) is the principal part enlarged view shown in the state which made the fixed piece face the lower frame attachment surface of a rear frame member, (b) is the fixed concave part of the fixed piece of the passage attachment piece of a ball passage part. It is a principal part enlarged view shown in the state which faced. It is the principal part disassembled perspective view which looked at the frame-shaped decorative body which concerns on an Example from the front side. (a) is a front view of the stage forming member according to the embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the stage forming member according to the embodiment, and (c) is a plan view of the stage forming member according to the embodiment. FIG. It is a bottom view which shows the state which assembled | attached the stage formation member to the front frame base member which concerns on an Example. (a) is a front view of the wall member which concerns on an Example, (b) is a top view of the wall member which concerns on an Example. (a) is the exploded perspective view which looked at the ball passage part concerning an example from the front side, (b) is the exploded perspective view which looked at the ball passage part concerning an example from the back side, (c) These are the front views of the ball passage part concerning an example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the production unit which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is a top view of the production | presentation unit which concerns on an Example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the production | presentation unit which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a rear view of the production unit according to the embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper light emission direction device which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper light emission direction device which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a vertical side view of the production unit according to the embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the disk shaped base member which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a rear view of the wall upper part light emission production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the light passage member which concerns on an Example from the front side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the light passage member which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a front view of the light passage member concerning an example. It is a partial longitudinal cross-sectional side view which shows the state which assembled | attached the production | generation cover member to the light passage member which concerns on an Example. It is a front view of the upper light emission effect device according to the embodiment. (a) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example from the front side, (b) is a vertical side view of the movable presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is a front view which shows the shutter apparatus and upper light emission production | presentation apparatus which concern on an Example. It is a front view which shows the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example in the state which removed the transparent protective plate. It is a rear view of the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is a rear view which shows the state which moved only the left shutter member to the open position in the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is a rear view shown in the state which moved the shutter member on either side in the open position in the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower rail member of the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower rail member and shutter member of the shutter apparatus which concern on an Example from the rear side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the operation means of the shutter device concerning an example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the action | operation means of the shutter apparatus based on an Example from the rear side. It is a vertical side view of the shutter device according to the embodiment. It is a principal part vertical side view which shows the relationship between the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example, and an upper light emission production | presentation apparatus. It is a principal part vertical side view which shows the connection part of the action | operation member and shielding board of the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is a principal part vertical side view which shows the relationship between the lower rail member and decoration member of the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is a cross-sectional top view of the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is a principal part cross-sectional top view which shows the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example in the state which faced the left shutter member in the shielding position. It is a principal part cross-sectional top view which shows the shutter apparatus which concerns on an Example in the state which faced the left shutter member in the open position. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper and lower arc-shaped decorative bodies and the decorative member according to the embodiment from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper and lower arc-shaped decorative bodies and the decorative member according to the embodiment from the rear side. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the back unit which concerns on an Example, and the LED board of the upper left light emission decoration device. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the back unit which concerns on an Example, and the LED board of an upper right part light emission decoration device. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the back unit which concerns on an Example, and the LED board of the left side light emission decoration device. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the back unit which concerns on an Example, and the LED board of the right side light emission decoration device. It is an upper section side view of the back unit concerning an example. It is an upper part vertical side view of the back unit which concerns on an Example, Comprising: The relationship between the light emission decoration device of the upper left and right and a decoration window part is shown roughly. (a) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper left light emission decoration device which concerns on an Example from the front side, (b) is the exploded perspective view which looked at the left upper light emission decoration device which concerns on an Example from the rear side. . (a) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper right part light emission decoration device which concerns on an Example from the front side, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper right part light emission decoration device which concerns on an Example from the rear side. . It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side light emission decoration device which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side light emission decoration device which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right side light emission decoration device which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right side light emission decoration device which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a principal part longitudinal section top view of the left part in the game board concerning an example. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view of the right side part in the game board which concerns on an Example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side light emission direction device which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side illumination means concerning an Example from the rear side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right side light emission direction device which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right side illumination means which concerns on an Example from the rear side.

  Next, the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings by giving a preferred embodiment. In the embodiment, a pachinko machine that plays a game using a pachinko ball as a game ball will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, “front”, “rear”, “left”, and “right” are states when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front side (player side) as shown in FIG. 1 unless otherwise specified. It points at.

(About pachinko machines)
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment will be described later on the front side of the opening of the outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that is formed in a rectangular frame shape and fixed to an installation frame base (not shown) of the amusement store. A middle frame 12 as a main body frame on which the game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is detachably mounted is assembled so as to be openable and detachable, and various symbols can be variably displayed on the back side of the game board 30. The symbol display device 19 is arranged to be detachable. A front frame 13 as a decorative frame having a glass plate for seeing through and protecting the game board 30 is assembled to the front side of the middle frame 12 so as to be openable and closable, and a pachinko ball is provided below the front frame 13. The lower ball receiving tray 15 that stores the water is assembled so as to be openable and closable. In the embodiment, an upper ball tray 14 for storing pachinko balls is integrally assembled at a lower position of the front frame 13, and the upper ball tray 14 is also integrally integrated with the opening and closing of the front frame 13. Configured to open and close.

(About the middle frame)
As shown in FIG. 3, the middle frame 12 has a synthetic resin upper frame member 20 forming an upper edge, a lower edge, and a synthetic resin in which a speaker 16, a ball hitting device 17, an operation handle 18, and the like are installed. It is composed of a lower frame member 21 made of metal, a left frame member 22 made of metal that forms a left edge, and a right frame member 23 made of metal that forms a right edge. When 23 is assembled, the whole is formed in a rectangular frame shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 11. And the opening part opened to the front and back when the said frame member on the upper and lower sides and right and left is assembled | attached functions as the game board holding | maintenance part 24 which installs the said game board 30. FIG. Here, the middle frame 12 is pivotally supported via support shafts (not shown) provided at the upper left end and the lower left end of the outer frame 11, and rotates the middle frame 12 around the left end. By doing so, the middle frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 11.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the left end portion of the game board 30 is rotatably and detachably held at a position spaced apart vertically on the inner side of the opening of the left frame member 22 (game board holding section 24 side). A plurality of rotating holders 25a, 25a are provided (two in the embodiment, but may be one or three or more), and at the right end (on the right frame member 23 side) of the upper and lower frame members. Rotating fixtures 25b and 25b are provided at the fixed position and the fixed release position, respectively, and the upper right and lower ends of the game board 30 can be fixed to the middle frame 12 by the fixtures 25b and 25b. Yes. That is, in order to dispose the game board 30 on the middle frame 12, the game board 30 is pushed by pushing the right end of the game board 30 while the left end of the game board 30 is held by the rotary holding tools 25a and 25a. The board 30 is rotated around the left end (rotating holders 25a, 25a) so that the entire gaming board 30 faces the gaming board holder 24, and the fixtures 25b, 25b are rotationally displaced to a fixed position. The upper right and lower ends of the right side of the game board 30 are supported and fixed. As described above, the gaming board 30 according to the embodiment is supported so that the left end is the center of rotation, like the middle frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 6, on the back side of the upper frame member 20, a ball tank 26 for storing pachinko balls supplied from an external ball supply facility provided on an installation frame base or the like is provided on the upper frame member. It is provided over almost the entire width of 20 left and right widths. As shown in FIG. 6, the ball tank 26 is formed so as to overlap with the upper part on the back side of the game board 30 disposed in the game board holding part 24, and the vertical dimension of the game board 30 can be maximized. It is like that. Further, on the back side of the lower frame member 21, a ball supply path that communicates with the upper and lower ball trays 14 and 15 and a ball discharge path that communicates with a ball collection basket provided on the installation frame base are respectively formed ( Neither is shown), and a control device 700 (see FIG. 13) for controlling the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the set member. The ball tank 26 and the set member are connected to each other via a ball passage unit 27 (see FIG. 3) installed between the members, and a ball dispensing device disposed in the ball passage unit 27. The pachinko balls supplied to the ball tank 26 by driving (not shown) are supplied to the upper and lower ball trays 14 and 15.

(About game board)
As shown in FIG. 2 or 4, the game board 30 disposed in the game board holding part 24 of the middle frame 12 has a game area 32 in which a pachinko ball can flow down on the front surface (board surface). A flat transparent plate 31 made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material such as acrylic or polycarbonate, and the symbol display device 19 are detachably disposed on the rear surface of the transparent plate 31 and both are described later. Opaque synthetic resin in which the shutter device (game effect component) 500, the light emitting decoration device (game effect component) 90, 105, 120, 145, 167, and the side light effect device (game effect component) 170, 177 are arranged A back unit 50 formed of a material, and configured so that the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 can be viewed from the front side through an opening 52a formed in the back unit 50 that opens in the front-rear direction. Yes. Here, the opening 52a formed in the back unit 50 is a large opening 52a in which most of the vertical and horizontal widths of the back unit 50 are opened. In addition, the transparent plate 31 of an Example is formed in the flat form of a fixed thickness dimension (10 mm) with the acrylic resin. Here, the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 are formed in a size and a shape in which the outline shape is substantially matched, and the rear surface of the transparent plate 31 is placed in a state where the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 are assembled. The unit 50 is configured to cover the entire surface so that the back side of the game board 30 (back unit 50) cannot be seen from the front side.

(About transparent plate)
As shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 4 or FIG. 7, on the front surface of the transparent plate 31, a guide rail 34 formed in an arc shape bulging to the left is disposed, and to the right of the guide rail 34 A first panel decoration member 33a formed in an arc shape with the left end edge recessed rightward is disposed at the position. The gaming area 32 is defined in a substantially circular shape by the guide rail 34 and the first board surface decoration member 33a. Further, on the board surface of the transparent plate 31, a second board surface decoration member 33b is disposed on the left side of the guide rail 34 (outside the game area 32). Each of the first and second panel surface decoration members 33a and 33b is formed of an opaque synthetic resin material, and a portion of the transparent plate 31 where the first and second panel decoration members 33a and 33b are disposed is provided. The rear side (back unit 50) can be visually recognized in the removed area (that is, the game area 32). Further, the transparent plate 31 has a plurality of fixing holes 31d and screw holes 31e for fixing the back unit 50 at the rear thereof at positions overlapping the first and second panel surface decoration members 33a and 33b. Is formed. A large number of game nails (not shown) are planted in the game area 32 of the transparent plate 31, and the flow direction is changed irregularly by the contact of the pachinko balls flowing down the game area 32. To get.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the guide rail 34 is provided in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the surface of the transparent plate 31, and is separated from the outer rail 35 in which a strip-shaped metal thin plate is curved in an arc shape and to the right of the outer rail 35. And an inner rail 36 made of synthetic resin. Here, the outer rail 35 and the inner rail 36 are provided on the transparent plate 31 so as to allow one pachinko ball to pass therethrough, and the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 allow the pachinko ball to pass through. A passage 34a is defined. The inner rail 36 is configured so that the open end faces the upper part on the left side of the transparent plate 31, and the pachinko balls launched from the hitting ball launching device 17 are guided by both rails from the lower side to the left side of the transparent plate 31. The inner rail 36 is driven from the open end to the upper part of the game area 32 and flows down in the game area 32.

  2, 4 or 7, the inner rail 36 is formed in an arc shape following the outer rail 35, and is formed at the lower end of the rail main body 36a. It is comprised from the flat plate part 36b extended inside. Here, the flat plate portion 36b of the inner rail 36 is provided so as to be located at the most downstream portion of the game area 32, and an out port 36c opening in the front-rear direction is formed in the flat plate portion 36b. Further, the transparent plate 31 is formed with a ball discharge notch (discharge port) 31f that opens to the front and rear and opens downward at a position corresponding to the out port 36c. The pachinko balls that have flowed down to the downstream portion are discharged to the back side of the game board 30 (transparent plate 31) through the out port 36c and the ball discharge notch 31f. The pachinko balls discharged from the ball discharge notch 31f are guided to a ball collection unit (not shown) provided on the back side of the middle frame 12, and the ball collection unit provides an installation frame base and the like. It is collected in an external ball collecting basket (not shown) provided. Further, the rear surface of the flat plate portion 36b (the surface facing the transparent plate 31) is subjected to light diffusion processing such as embossing, and the ball discharge notch portion 31f and the notch for wiring insertion of the back unit 50 are provided. The opening edge of the portion 55a (described later) is difficult to see from the front side.

  The transparent plate 31 is formed with a through-hole 30a (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 7) penetrating back and forth on the front side of the opening 52a formed in the back unit 50. A frame-shaped decorative body 200 (described later) that opens in the front-rear direction is disposed. That is, the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 facing from the opening 52a of the back unit 50 is exposed to the front side of the transparent plate 31 through the window 200a that opens to the front and rear of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. The symbol variation effect developed on the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 can be viewed from the front side. In addition, an arc-shaped bowl-shaped portion 208 (described later) that protrudes from the transparent plate 31 to the front surface is provided at the upper edge portion of the frame-shaped decorative body 200, and pachinko balls launched into the game area 32 are provided. Flowing down (falling) across the window 200a of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is restricted by the hook-shaped portion 208.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the front surface of the transparent plate 31 is opened forward and backward at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the transparent plate 31 at a position below the through hole 30a (position where the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is disposed). The first mounting opening 31b is established, and a start winning device (winning device) 38 and a special winning device (winning device) 43 capable of winning a pachinko ball flowing down the game area 32 are arranged in the first mounting port 31b. It is configured to install. In the embodiment, a special winning device 43 is disposed below the start winning device 38. A predetermined number (for example, five) of the pachinko balls are given as winning balls to the upper and lower lower ball trays 15 when the pachinko balls win the starting winning ports (winning ports) 40a, 40b of the starting winning device 38. At the same time as the payout, a symbol variation effect is started on the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19. As a result of the symbol variation effect, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a triple of the same symbols) is displayed on the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, a so-called “hit” is generated, and thereby, the winning of the pachinko ball to the special winning device 43 is allowed and a large number of winning balls can be obtained. Further, on the left and right sides of the first mounting opening 31b in the transparent plate 31, a second mounting opening 31c that opens in the front-rear direction is established, and a normal winning device 48 is attached to each second mounting opening 31c. The pachinko balls flowing down the game area 32 win the normal winning device 48, so that a predetermined number (for example, ten) of pachinko balls are paid out to the upper and lower ball trays 14 and 15 as prize balls. It has become.

(About the start winning device)
Here, the configuration of the start winning device 38 disposed on the transparent plate 31 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the start winning device 38 includes a first mounting base plate (mounting base plate) 39 attached to the front surface of the transparent plate 31, and a front side of the first mounting base plate 39. Provided in the upper start winning opening 40a where the pachinko balls flowing down the game area 32 can win, and the lower part provided below the upper start winning opening 40a where the pachinko balls flowing down the game area 32 can win. A start winning port 40b and a device main body 41 provided on the rear surface side of the first mounting base plate 39 and capable of being inserted into the first mounting port 31b from the front side. The device main body 41 is connected to the first mounting port 31b. The first mounting base plate 39 is fixed to the front surface of the transparent plate 31 with screws. Here, the first mounting base plate 39 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin material so as not to transmit light, and an opening edge of a first accommodating portion 76a (first partition wall 76) described later of the back unit 50. The part is difficult to see from the front side.

  Further, the start winning device 38 is provided with a pair of blade members (opening and closing members) 42, 42 that can swing so as to approach and separate from each other at the left and right positions sandwiching the lower start winning port 40b. In a state where the pair of blade members 42 and 42 are swung so as to be close to each other (see FIG. 8A), the lower start winning opening 40b is closed so that the pachinko ball cannot be won, and the pair of blade members The lower start winning opening 40b is opened so that the pachinko ball can be won in a state where the swinging 42 and 42 are separated from each other. Furthermore, the device main body 41 of the start winning device 38 is provided with a drive solenoid 41a as a driving means for swinging the blade members 42, 42, and has won the upper and lower start winning ports 40a, 40b. A ball detection sensor 41b for detecting a pachinko ball is provided. When the ball detection sensor 41b detects a pachinko ball, a winning ball is paid out and a symbol variation effect is started on the symbol display device 19. It has become.

(About special prize-winning equipment)
Next, the configuration of the special winning device 43 disposed on the transparent plate 31 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 8 (b), the special prize-winning device 43 is attached to the front surface of the transparent plate 31, and has a second special mounting base in which a horizontally long special prize-winning opening (winning prize opening) 44a is opened. A plate (mounting base plate) 44, a device main body 45 provided on the rear surface side of the second mounting base plate 44 and inserted from the front side into the first mounting port 31b, and a special prize formed on the device main body 45 Opening forward so as to be aligned with the opening 44a, a winning space 46 through which the pachinko ball can be won through the special winning opening 44a, and an opening / closing which is pivotally supported by the apparatus main body 45 so as to freely open and close the special winning opening 44a. The second mounting base plate 44 is screwed to the front surface of the transparent plate 31 in a state in which the device main body 45 is inserted from the front side into the first mounting port 31b. Here, the second mounting base plate 44 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin material so as not to transmit light, and an opening edge of a second accommodating portion 77a (second partition wall 77) described later of the back unit 50. The part is difficult to see from the front side. Further, the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 are such that the lower end portion of the first mounting base plate 39 and the upper end portion of the second mounting base plate 44 are close to each other, and the lower end of the second mounting base plate 44 is. And the upper end portion of the flat plate portion 36b are close to each other, and the first and second mounting base plates 39, the front sides of the first and second accommodating portions 76a and 77a and the wiring insertion notch portion 55a are arranged. 44 and the flat plate part 36b are configured so that the back side of the back unit 50 is not visually recognized from the front side of the transparent plate 31 (game board 30).

  The opening / closing door 47 is formed in a flat plate shape having a size substantially matching the special winning opening 44a, and is pivotally supported by the apparatus main body 45 so that an upper end portion thereof is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, when the open / close door 47 closes the special winning opening 44a (see FIG. 8B), the pachinko ball cannot be won into the special winning opening 44a, and the upper end of the open / close door 47 swings forward. In the moved state, the winning of the pachinko ball to the special winning opening 44a is allowed. Further, the device main body 45 of the special winning device 43 is provided with a driving solenoid (not shown) as a driving means for swinging the opening / closing door 47 and detects a pachinko ball that has won a winning space 46. A ball detection sensor (not shown) is provided, and a prize ball is paid out when the ball detection sensor detects a pachinko ball. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment, the special winning device 43 is configured to repeat a round game a plurality of times (for example, 15 times) when the symbol is stopped by a predetermined symbol combination on the symbol display device 19 and a big hit occurs. The drive solenoid is controlled. Here, in one round game, the door 47 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or the ball detection sensor detects a predetermined number (for example, 10) of pachinko balls. 47 is closed and finished.

(About frame-shaped ornaments)
The frame-shaped decorative body 200 is formed in a substantially circular frame shape that opens in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a through-opening (opening) 31a opened in the transparent plate 31, as shown in FIG. ing. And the said symbol display apparatus 19 arrange | positioned at the said back unit 50 can be visually recognized from the front side facing the inner side (window 200a) of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, an effect unit 201 that emits light and produces a movable effect in accordance with the gaming state is attached to the upper part of the frame-shaped decorative body 200, and the effect unit 201 serves as a window 200 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. It can be seen from the front side. As shown in FIG. 15, the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is divided into upper and lower parts, and is composed of an upper frame body 202 and a lower frame body 203. An outer peripheral wall 204 (consisting of an upper outer peripheral wall 225 and a lower outer peripheral wall 252 described later) of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is formed so as to be slightly spaced along the inner side of the through hole 31a of the transparent plate 31; The frame-shaped decorative body 200 is assembled to the transparent plate 31 by inserting the outer peripheral wall 204 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 from the front side with respect to the through-hole 31a. Further, on the left and right sides of the frame-shaped decorative body 200, a pair of ball passage portions 274, 274 for taking pachinko balls flowing down the game area 32 into the inner peripheral lower edge portion (stage portion 271 described later) of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. Is provided.

(About the upper frame)
As shown in FIG. 15, the upper frame body 202 includes a rear frame member 205 attached to the transparent plate 31 and a front frame member 206 assembled on the front side of the rear frame member 205, and the front frame member An upper frame decorative cover (decorative cover) 207 as a covering portion is attached to the front side of 206. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the front side of the upper frame 202 constitutes a hook-shaped portion 208 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the transparent plate 31 when the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is assembled to the transparent plate 31. The pachinko ball flowing down the game area 32 is brought into contact with the bowl-shaped portion 208 so that the pachinko ball does not flow into the frame-shaped decorative body 200 across the upper frame 202.

(About rear frame member)
The rear frame member 205 is entirely formed of a colorless transparent member, and can transmit light from the surroundings. As shown in FIG. 16, the rear frame member 205 is formed such that a contact mounting portion 209 that contacts the front surface of the transparent plate 31 protrudes upward, and the corresponding contact mounting portion 209 contacts the transparent plate 31. The rear frame member 205 is attached to the transparent plate 31 by being screwed. Further, side flange portions 210 and 210 projecting toward the game area 32 are formed on the left and right side portions of the rear frame member 205, and the side flange portions are formed when the rear frame member 205 is assembled to the transparent plate 31. 210 and 210 are in contact with the front surface of the transparent plate 31 (see FIG. 4). The side flanges 210 are screwed to the transparent plate 31 with the side flanges 210 in contact with the transparent plate 31.

  As shown in FIG. 16, a pair of projecting pieces 211 and 211 are formed on the front surface of each side flange portion 210 so as to protrude forward while being spaced apart in the left-right direction. The spacing between the protruding pieces 211 and 211 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the pachinko sphere. Further, a boss receiving portion 211a having a screw hole is provided on the protruding piece 211 on the outer side (the game area 32 side). Further, the left side flange portion 210 is provided with a sensor attachment port 212 which is located between the protruding pieces 211 and 211 and is opened in the front-rear direction, and the ball detection sensor 213 is disposed in the rear side of the sensor attachment port 212. It is designed to be inserted through. As shown in FIG. 17, in this ball detection sensor 213, a rectangular sensor body 214 is provided with a passage opening 214a that opens up and down, and the ball detection sensor 213 passes through the passage opening 214a so that the ball detection sensor 213 is in a pachinko manner. A sphere is detected, and a normal LED (not shown) of a normal symbol display unit 144 described later is changed. A wiring 213a for transmitting a pachinko ball detection signal is led out at the rear of the sensor body 214, and the wiring 213a is located behind the transparent plate 31 via first and second wiring passages 231 and 241 described later. It has been drawn to. In the embodiment, the sphere detection sensor 213 is attached only to the left side of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. Therefore, the right side flange portion 210 is not provided with a member for installing the ball detection sensor 213 such as the sensor attachment port 212.

  As shown in FIG. 18, a pair of sensor fixing pieces 215 and 215 projecting rearward from the upper and lower opening edges of the sensor mounting port 212 are provided on the rear surface of the left side flange portion 210 on the left side (right side in FIG. 18). When the sphere detection sensor 213 is inserted into the sensor attachment port 212, the sphere detection sensor 213 is guided by the upper and lower sensor fixing pieces 215 and 215, and the upper and lower portions of the sphere detection sensor 213 attached to the sensor attachment port 212 are guided. The surface is configured to be supported by both fixed pieces 215 and 215 (see FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 17, a hook-like hook portion 216 protruding rearward is formed on the rear surface of the left side flange portion 210, and the hook portion 216 is a rear end portion of the sensor main body 214 of the ball detection sensor 213. Are to be locked. As shown in FIG. 19, on the right side (left side in FIG. 19) of the hook portion 216 on the rear surface of the left side flange portion 210, a pair of passage defining walls 217, 217 spaced in the vertical direction extend in the left-right direction. An existing wiring communication path 218 is formed. The wiring communication path 218 communicates with a first wiring path 231 described later, and guides the wiring 213a of the ball detection sensor 213 attached to the sensor attachment port 212 to the first wiring path 231 via the wiring communication path 218. It is like that.

  The rear frame member 205 is formed with a flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219 that extends forward and constitutes the outer surface of the flange-shaped portion 208, and an inner side that extends inward from the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219. An extension part 220 is formed. As shown in FIG. 20, the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219 extends forward from the front surface of the transparent plate 31 when the rear frame member 205 is assembled to the transparent plate 31. As shown in FIG. 16, hook-shaped lower frame locking pieces 221 and 221 are formed on the left and right inner surfaces of the hook-shaped outer peripheral wall 219 so as to protrude inward. And the area | region below each lower frame latching piece 221 of the said inner side extension part 220 is made into the lower frame attachment surface 222, and the fixing piece 263 (after-mentioned) of the said lower frame body 203 is attached to each lower frame attachment surface 222. Is supposed to be fixed. Each lower frame mounting surface 222 is formed with a mounting projection 223 protruding forward, and a ball passage fixing hole 224 is formed at the lower end of the lower frame mounting surface 222.

  The rear frame member 205 is formed with an upper outer peripheral wall (first rear extending portion) 225 that protrudes rearward from the contact mounting portion 209 and constitutes the upper portion of the outer peripheral wall 204 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. . The upper outer peripheral wall 225 is formed to extend along the opening edge of the through hole 31a of the transparent plate 31, and the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is assembled to the transparent plate 31 as shown in FIG. In this case, the upper outer peripheral wall 225 extends rearward from the rear surface of the transparent plate 31 through the through hole 31a. As shown in FIG. 21, a mounting recess 226 formed by cutting forward from the rear edge of the upper outer peripheral wall 225 is formed at the center position of the upper outer peripheral wall 225. Further, a first outlet notch 227 is formed at the rear edge of the upper outer peripheral wall 225 that defines the mounting recess 226. As shown in FIG. 18, a plurality of fixing protrusions 225a and screw holes 225b are formed on the inner peripheral surface of the upper outer peripheral wall 225. A plurality of wiring hooks 228 for hooking and guiding the wiring 213a of the sphere detection sensor 213 are provided on the inner peripheral surface on the left side of the upper outer peripheral wall 225. As shown in FIG. 19, a wiring communication port 229 is formed on the left side of the upper outer peripheral wall 225 between the upper and lower passage defining walls 217, 217, and the wiring is connected via the wiring communication port 229. The communication path 218 communicates with the first wiring path 231.

  The rear frame member 205 is provided with first inner peripheral walls 230, 230 that are spaced inwardly and extend rearward with respect to the upper outer peripheral wall 225. The first inner peripheral wall 230 constitutes a part of the inner peripheral wall of the frame-shaped decorative body 200, and the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is assembled to the through-hole 31a of the transparent plate 31 as shown in FIG. When this occurs, the first inner peripheral wall 230 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the transparent plate 31 through the through hole 31a. Further, the portion extending in the vertical direction of the first inner peripheral wall 230 is configured to extend further rearward than the upper outer peripheral wall 225. The first inner peripheral wall 230 is subjected to a light diffusion process, and the light of the LEDs provided on the left side light emitting effect device 170 and the right side light effect device 177, which will be described later, is applied to the left and right first inner peripheral walls 230, 230. Irradiated, the first inner peripheral walls 230, 230 are brightened. In addition, each first inner peripheral wall 230 is provided with a required design pattern, and when the first inner peripheral wall 230 is irradiated with light, the pattern is brightened. Here, as shown in FIG. 19, the first inner peripheral wall 230 extends substantially in parallel to the upper outer peripheral wall 225 with a predetermined distance therebetween. The first inner peripheral wall 230 and the upper outer peripheral wall 225 on the left side define a first wiring passage 231 through which the wiring 213a of the sphere detection sensor 213 passes.

(About the front frame member)
FIG. 22A is a front view showing the front frame member 206 in a state where the upper frame decorative cover 207 is attached. The front frame member 206 is entirely composed of a transparent member except for left and right front frame decoration parts (covering parts) 233 and 233 which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 22 (b), the front frame member 206 extends outward from the front frame member 206, and extends outwardly in the same shape as the inner extension 220 of the rear frame member 205. Part 232. The outer extending portion 232 is positioned on the front side of the inner extending portion 220 when the front frame member 206 is assembled to the rear frame member 205. On the left and right end sides of the outer extending portion 232, front frame decorative portions (cover portions) 233 and 233 are formed by directly printing a required decorative pattern. The left front frame decoration portion 233 is located on the front side of the first wiring passage 231 and prevents the wiring 213a of the ball detection sensor 213 inserted through the first wiring passage 231 from being seen from the player side. is doing.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, a passage fixing boss 234 protrudes rearward on the lower side of the rear surface of the front frame decoration portion 233 of the outer extension portion 232. Each front frame decoration portion 233 of the outer extension portion 232 is formed with a decoration flange portion 235 extending to the game area 32 side. When the front frame member 206 is assembled to the rear frame member 205, The rear surface of the decorative flange portion 235 comes into contact with the front ends of the protruding pieces 211 and 211 provided on the side flange portion 210 (see FIG. 17). The decorative flange portion 235 and the two protruding pieces 211 and 211 define a ball passage gate 236 through which a pachinko ball flowing down the game area 32 can pass. A rectangular sensor support surface 237 is formed on the rear surface of each decorative flange portion 235, and the left sensor support surface 237 abuts on the front end surface of the ball detection sensor 213 inserted through the sensor mounting port 212, thereby detecting a ball. The position of the sensor 213 is regulated from the front. That is, the ball detection sensor 213 is inserted from behind the sensor mounting opening 212 of the rear frame member 205, the front end of the ball detection sensor 213 comes into contact with the sensor support surface 237, and the hook portion 216 is connected to the sensor body 214. By engaging with the rear portion, the ball detection sensor 213 is attached to the sensor attachment port 212. At this time, the passage opening 214a of the sphere detection sensor 213 faces the sphere passage gate 236, and the sphere detection sensor 213 detects the pachinko sphere passing through the sphere passage gate 236.

  A fixed boss 235a having a screw hole is formed on the rear surface of the decorative flange portion 235. When the front frame member 206 is assembled to the rear frame member 205, the rear end of the fixed boss 235a The boss receiving portion 211 a provided on the flange portion 210 is fitted. And the side flange part 210 and the decoration flange part 235 are fixed by screwing the fixing boss 235a of the decoration flange part 235 fitted to the boss receiving part 211a of the side flange part 210. .

  The front frame member 206 includes a second inner peripheral wall (second rear extension portion) 238 extending rearward. The second inner peripheral wall 238 constitutes the inner peripheral wall of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 together with the first inner peripheral wall 230 of the rear frame member 205, and the frame-shaped decorative body 200 serves as the through-hole 31 a of the transparent plate 31. When assembled, the second inner peripheral wall 238 extends rearward of the transparent plate 31 through the through hole 31a. The second inner peripheral wall 238 includes side inner peripheral walls 239 and 239 that are located on both the left and right sides and extend along the first inner peripheral wall 230, and a central inner peripheral wall 240 that is positioned at the center of the second inner peripheral wall 238. Composed. The rear end edge of the side inner peripheral wall 239 extends so as to coincide with the front end edge of the first inner peripheral wall 230, and the side inner peripheral wall when the front frame member 206 is assembled to the rear frame member 205. The rear end edge of 239 is in contact with the front end edge of the first inner peripheral wall 230 to form the same surface (see FIG. 14).

  23, when the front frame member 206 is assembled to the rear frame member 205, the central inner peripheral wall 240 is spaced apart from the upper outer peripheral wall 225 and extends substantially in parallel. It has become. An arc-shaped passage defined by the central inner peripheral wall 240 and the upper outer peripheral wall 225 constitutes a second wiring passage 241 through which the wiring 213a of the sphere detection sensor 213 passes. The second wiring passage 241 communicates with the first wiring passage 231, and the wiring 213 a of the sphere detection sensor 213 is located at the substantially upper center of the upper frame body 202 via the first wiring passage 231 and the second wiring passage 241. Guided to position. That is, the wiring 213 a of the sphere detection sensor 213 is guided through the inside of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 along the opening edge of the decorative body 200. The wiring 213a inserted through the second wiring passage 241 is led out from the second wiring passage 241 through the first outlet notch 227 (a wiring outlet 323 described later), and is described later as an effect unit relay board (relay). Substrate) is bundled with wiring 201a of 311 and is drawn out behind transparent plate 31 (see FIG. 24). Then, the wiring 213a of the ball detection sensor 213 is pulled out rearward through an upper center wiring insertion port 71 (to be described later) of the back unit 50, and the connector board 213b of the wiring 213a is provided on the intermediate frame 12. 702 is connected. The ball detection sensor 213 is electrically connected to the control device 700 provided on the back side of the middle frame 12 via the relay substrate 702.

  The second inner peripheral wall 238 is entirely subjected to a light diffusion process so that light coming from the surroundings is diffused and brightened. Further, by performing light diffusion processing on the second inner peripheral wall 238, it is difficult to see the wiring 213a of the sphere detection sensor 213 inserted through the first wiring passage 231 and the second wiring passage 241. A portion of the side inner peripheral wall 239 corresponding to the front frame decorative portion 233 is provided with a required pattern similar to that of the first inner peripheral wall 230 of the rear frame member 205 to improve the decorative effect. Yes.

  The upper frame decorative cover 207 is attached from the front side to a portion of the outer extending portion 232 excluding the front frame decorative portion 233. The upper frame decorative cover 207 is made of an opaque member and has a required decorative pattern on the surface. The upper frame decorative cover 207 is located on the front side of the first wiring passage 231 and the second wiring passage 241 and covers both the passages 231 and 241, and the wiring of the ball detection sensor 213 inserted through the passages 231 and 241. 213a is not visible from the front side. When the upper frame decorative cover 207 is attached to the outer extension portion 232, both ends of the upper frame decorative cover 207 are aligned with the upper side of each front frame decorative portion 233 so that the upper frame decorative cover 207 and the left and right The front frame decorations 233 and 233 are arranged in an arc shape (see FIG. 22A).

(About the lower frame)
As shown in FIG. 25, the lower frame body 203 is attached to the transparent plate 31 to form a lower frame decorative cover 242 that constitutes the front surface of the lower frame body 203 (in FIG. 25, a central cover portion 247 (described later)). Only the lower frame decorative cover 242 is attached to the front surface, a lower frame base member 243 attached to the front surface, a stage forming member 244 assembled to the lower frame base member 243 from the rear, and assembled to the stage forming member 244 from the rear Each member 243, 244, 245 except for the lower frame decorative cover 242 is made of a transparent member.

(About the bottom decorative cover)
As shown in FIG. 14, the lower frame decorative cover 242 is composed of three cover parts, a left cover part 246, a central cover part 247, and a right cover part 248. Each member is subjected to a light diffusion process. The required pattern is added to enhance the decorative effect. Since the left cover portion 246 and the right cover portion 248 are symmetrical, only the left cover portion 246 will be described in the following description, and the right cover portion 248 will be described in detail with the same reference numerals. The detailed explanation is omitted.

  The left cover portion 246 is formed in a thin plate-like substantially crescent shape, and the left cover portion 246 is attached to the transparent plate 31 by screwing the left cover portion 246 in contact with the front surface of the transparent plate 31. (See FIG. 2). As shown in FIG. 26, a plurality of fixed bosses 246a having screw holes are provided on the rear surface of the left cover portion 246 so as to protrude rearward. A cover engaging piece 249 that protrudes outward is formed at the end of the left cover portion 246 on the side of the center cover portion 247 (right side), and the left cover portion 246 is formed on the rear surface of the upper edge portion of the center cover portion 247. It is attached to the lower frame base member 243 in a locked state.

  The central cover part 247 has a crescent shape longer than the left cover part 246, and the central cover part 247 is transparent by abutting the central cover part 247 against the transparent plate 31 and screwing. It can be attached to the front surface of the plate 31. In the center of the center cover portion 247, a ball outlet 250 is formed that opens right above the upper start winning port 40a of the start winning device 38 and discharges pachinko balls from the stage portion 271. In addition, a recessed portion 247a is formed at an upper central position of the central cover portion 247, and right and left sides sandwiching the recessed portion 247a constitute cover regulating walls 251 and 251 that prevent the pachinko balls from falling from the stage portion 271. is doing.

  On the rear surface of the center cover portion 247, four fixed bosses 247b provided with screw holes are provided to protrude rearward. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, cover engaging pieces 249 and 249 projecting toward the left cover portion 246 and the right cover portion 248 are formed on the left and right ends of the central cover portion 247, respectively. Then, both cover engaging pieces 249 and 249 of the central cover portion 247 are engaged with the lower edge portions of the rear surface of the left cover portion 246 and the right cover portion 248, respectively (see FIG. 26). That is, the left cover portion 246 and the right cover portion 248 are respectively coupled to the center cover portion 247 by the cover engaging pieces 249 and 249 so that the entire lower frame decorative cover 242 is firmly connected. The ball outlet 250 is appropriately positioned with respect to the transparent plate 31.

  The lower frame base member 243 includes a lower outer peripheral wall 252 extending rearward. When the upper frame body 202 and the lower frame body 203 are assembled, the lower outer peripheral wall 252 and the upper outer periphery of the rear frame member 205 are provided. The wall 225 constitutes the outer peripheral wall 204 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 (see FIG. 15). As shown in FIG. 27, in the lower frame base member 243, fixing bosses 247b and 247b located at both left and right ends of the central cover portion 247 are inserted into the lower frame front surface portion 253 to which the lower frame decorative cover 242 is attached. And a pair of lower frame base bosses 254 and 254 that open in the front-rear direction are formed between the through holes 253a and 253a so as to protrude rearward. Two fixed bosses 247b and 247b on the center side of the center cover portion 247 are inserted into the lower frame base boss 254, respectively, and the fixed boss 247b of the center cover portion 247 is inserted into the lower frame base boss 254. At this time, the rear end surfaces of both 254 and 247b are configured to be aligned on the same surface.

  In addition, a plurality of positioning insertion holes 253b are provided at positions corresponding to the left cover portion 246 and the right cover portion 248 of the lower frame front surface portion 253, respectively. A fixing boss 246a provided on the left cover portion 246 (right cover portion 248) is inserted into the positioning insertion hole 253b, and a screw (not shown) is screwed from the rear, whereby the left cover portion 246 (right cover portion 248). Is attached to the lower frame base member 243. Further, as shown in FIG. 27B, a lower frame base protrusion 255 protruding rearward is provided on the side of each lower frame base boss 254 on the rear surface of the lower frame front surface portion 253.

  Between the lower frame base bosses 254 and 254 in the lower frame front surface portion 253, a U-shaped lower frame base front opening 256 opened in the front-rear direction and upward is formed. The lower frame base front opening 256 is configured to communicate with the ball outlet 250 of the central cover portion 247 when the central cover portion 247 is assembled to the lower frame base member 243. Plate-like front horizontal passage defining walls 257 and 257 extend rearward from both side edges of the lower frame base front opening 256, and a front horizontal passage bottom 258 extends rearward from the lower edge of the lower frame base front opening 256. Exist. A front horizontal passage (second ball passage) 259 for sending a pachinko ball to the ball outlet 250 is defined by the front horizontal passage defining walls 257 and 257 and the front horizontal passage bottom 258. The front horizontal passage bottom 258 is provided with a pair of front horizontal passage ribs 260, 260 extending in the front-rear direction so as to be spaced apart from each other in parallel to the left and right. The front horizontal passage rib 260 is inclined downward toward the front, and is configured to send a pachinko ball flowing through the front horizontal passage 259 forward (see FIG. 28).

  Guide cutouts 261 and 261 extending in the front-rear direction are provided in the lower frame front surface portion 253 so as to correspond to the left and right, and a region between both guide cutouts 261 and 261 of the lower frame base member 243 is connected to the stage mounting portion 262. Has been. In addition, fixing pieces 263 and 263 extending upward are formed at both ends of the lower frame base member 243, respectively. Since the left and right fixing pieces 263 and 263 have a symmetrical shape, in the following description, the left fixing piece 263 will be described, and the right fixing piece 263 will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 29A, the fixed piece 263 has a shape that can be aligned with the lower frame mounting surface 222 of the rear frame member 205, and the rear surface of the fixed piece 263 contacts the lower frame mounting surface 222. It comes to touch. The fixed piece 263 is formed with a fixed cylindrical portion 264 that protrudes forward, and the mounting protrusion 223 provided on the lower frame mounting surface 222 is inserted into the fixed cylindrical portion 264. Then, the mounting protrusion 223 is inserted into the fixed cylindrical portion 264 so that the fixing piece 263 is brought into contact with the lower frame mounting surface 222, and the front frame member 206 is faced with the ball passage portion 274 as will be described later. Is assembled to the rear frame member 205 so that the fixing piece 263 is sandwiched between the front frame member 206 and the rear frame member 205. Accordingly, the lower frame base member 243 (lower frame body 203) is assembled to the upper frame body 202.

  A fixed concave portion (concave portion) 265 is provided below the fixed cylindrical portion 264 in the fixed piece 263, and a concave portion insertion hole 266 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in the fixed concave portion 265. The concave portion insertion hole 266 is configured to be aligned in the front-rear direction with the ball passage fixing hole 224 of the lower frame mounting surface 222 when the fixing piece 263 faces the lower frame mounting surface 222. Further, the concave portion insertion hole 266 is configured such that a passage fixing boss 234 provided at the lower end portion of the front frame member 206 can be inserted (see FIG. 30).

  The fixed piece 263 includes a contact piece portion 267 that extends forward from the outer edge of the fixed piece 263. The contact piece 267 has a shape along the inner surface of the lower end portion of the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219 of the rear frame member 205, and the contact piece 267 is formed when the fixing piece 263 faces the lower frame mounting surface 222. 267 is adapted to abut on the inner surface of the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219 for guidance. Further, the upper end edge of the contact piece 267 is configured to face the lower frame locking piece 221 of the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219 when the fixed piece 263 faces the lower frame mounting surface 222. Further, an engaging projection 268 is formed to protrude outwardly below the abutting piece 267 in the fixed piece 263, and when the fixed piece 263 is faced to the lower frame mounting surface 222, the outer periphery of the bowl-shaped portion The lower end edge of the wall 219 is locked to the engaging protrusion 268 (see FIG. 29B).

(About stage forming members)
As shown in FIGS. 31A to 31C, the stage forming member 244 has a stage portion 271 including a first stage 269 and a second stage 270 provided on the lower front side of the first stage 269. A stage flange portion 272 extending downward is formed between the first stage 269 and the second stage 270, and is slid from the rear to the stage mounting portion 262 provided on the lower frame base member 243, The stage forming member 244 is assembled to the lower frame base member 243. When the stage forming member 244 is assembled to the lower frame base member 243, the front surface of the stage flange portion 272 contacts the rear end surface of the four fixed bosses 247b of the center cover portion 247 and the rear end surface of the lower frame base boss 254. It comes in contact with and supported (see FIG. 32). In this state, the stage forming member 244 is screwed into the four fixed bosses 247b of the center cover portion 247 through the through holes 272a provided corresponding to the stage flange portion 272, so that the stage forming member 244 becomes the lower frame base member. 243 can be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31A, positioning holes 272b and 272b into which the lower frame base protrusions 255 and 255 of the lower frame base member 243 are fitted are provided on the center side of the stage flange portion 272. . Further, a plurality of fixed bosses 272c having screw holes are formed on the rear surface of the stage flange portion 272 so as to protrude rearward, and positioning bosses 273 and 273 protruding further rearward than the fixed boss 272c are separated from each other in the left-right direction. A pair is provided.

  The first stage 269 and the second stage 270 are both subjected to light diffusion processing throughout, and diffuse light arriving at both stages. The first stage 269 is formed so as to incline downward from the left and right ends toward the center, so that the pachinko balls that have flowed in through the ball passage portion 274 can roll vigorously. In addition, the central portion of the first stage 269 is raised in a mountain shape, and the number of pachinko balls that arrive at the central portion of the rolling surface of the first stage 269 is suppressed. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), a stage notch 269a that is slightly cut forward from the rear edge is provided at the center of the first stage 269. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), a guide lower protrusion 275 is formed on the lower surface of the first stage 269 so as to protrude downward from the center of the left and right of the stage notch 269a. At the front end edge of the first stage 269, stage restricting ribs 276, 276, 276 that slightly protrude upward are provided at the center and both the left and right sides, and pachinko balls that roll the first stage 269 by the rib 276 are provided. The fall to the second stage 270 is suppressed. In addition, upper guide surfaces 277 and 277 that are inclined downward and guide the pachinko ball to the second stage 270 are separated from each other at a portion of the first stage 269 where the stage restricting rib 276 is not provided. Two are formed.

  The second stage 270 is formed in an arc shape that is inclined downward from the left and right ends. When the stage forming member 244 is assembled to the lower frame base member 243, the second stage 270 is aligned with the stage mounting portion 262 of the lower frame base member 243. Configured to do. The extending length of the second stage 270 is set longer than that of the first stage 269. Further, a lower guide surface 278 that is inclined downward toward the front is formed at the center of the second stage 270 so as to guide the pachinko ball forward. Furthermore, outward guide pieces 279, 279 projecting outward are formed at the left and right ends of the second stage 270, and when the stage forming member 244 is slid to the stage mounting portion 262, each outward plan is provided. The inner piece 279 is configured to be guided while facing the corresponding guide notch 261.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 14, when the second stage 270 faces the stage mounting portion 262 of the lower frame base member 243, the front edge of the second stage 270 is the left cover portion 246 and the right cover portion 248. Is substantially aligned with the upper edge of the. Accordingly, the pachinko ball that rolls on the second stage 270 falls from the position where the left cover portion 246 or the right cover portion 248 is provided, or the pachinko ball that flows down the game area 32 changes from the corresponding portion to the stage portion 271. Inflow. On the other hand, with respect to the center cover portion 247, the front end edge of the second stage 270 and the upper end edge of the recessed portion 247a of the center cover portion 247 are aligned, and the cover regulating walls 251 and 251 protrude upward from the second stage 270. It is supposed to be. Accordingly, the pachinko balls that roll on the second stage 270 are actively guided to the center of the second stage 270 so that the pachinko balls are easily dropped from the lower guide surface 278.

(About wall members)
The wall member 245 is a plate-like member provided to prevent a pachinko ball rolling on the stage portion 271 from falling to the rear of the transparent plate 31, and as shown in FIG. In the state where 245 is assembled to the stage forming member 244, the upper portion of the wall member 245 faces the window 200 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), a boss receiving portion 245a having a through hole is formed on the front surface of the wall member 245 corresponding to the fixed boss 272c of the stage flange portion 272, and the wall member 245 is placed on the stage. When assembled to the forming member 244, the rear end of the fixed boss 272c of the stage flange portion 272 is fitted into the boss receiving portion 245a. The wall member 245 is attached to the stage forming member 244 by screwing the fixed boss 272c of the stage flange portion 272 through the through hole of the boss receiving portion 245a. At this time, the rear end edge of the first stage 269 contacts the front surface of the wall member 245 so that the wall member 245 is positioned (see FIG. 14). In addition, a pair of positioning holes 245b and 245b are opened in the wall member 245, and when the wall member 245 is assembled to the stage forming member 244, the positioning bosses 273 and 273 of the stage forming member 244 have the positioning holes 245b and 245b. It is comprised so that it may protrude rearward through.

  Two support wall portions 280 and 280 extending forward are formed on the front surface of the wall member 245 so as to avoid the left and right central portions of the wall member 245. Each support wall portion 280 has a shape along the first stage 269, and when the wall member 245 is assembled to the stage forming member 244, the both support wall portions 280 are slightly below the first stage 269. The wall member 245 is positioned by being separated and the front edge of the support wall portion 280 abutting against the rear surface of the stage flange portion 272. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), a vertical wall 281 is formed downward from the inner edge of each support wall 280, and a rear horizontal passage bottom 282 connecting the lower edges of both vertical walls 281 and 281. Is formed. A rear horizontal passage 283 for sending a pachinko ball forward is formed by the vertical wall portions 281 and 281 and the rear horizontal passage bottom portion 282. A horizontal support wall 284 that protrudes inward is provided at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of both the vertical wall portions 281 and 281. In addition, a pair of rear horizontal passage ribs 285 and 285 projecting upward from the rear horizontal passage bottom portion 282 and extending in the front-rear direction extend in parallel in the left-right direction. . When the wall member 245 is assembled to the stage forming member 244, the rear horizontal passage 283 is configured to communicate with the front horizontal passage 259 (see FIG. 28). At this time, the rear horizontal passage bottom 282 is in contact with the front horizontal passage bottom 258, and each rear horizontal passage rib 285 is substantially aligned with the corresponding front horizontal passage rib 260. The front end edge of the horizontal support wall 284 contacts the rear end edge of the front horizontal passage defining wall 257 of the lower frame base member 243 so that the wall member 245 is positioned.

  A rectangular opening 286 extending vertically is formed at the center of the wall member 245 in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 28, the rectangular opening 286 has an opening lower edge located at the rear horizontal passage bottom 282 and an upper opening edge located above the first stage 269, and the rectangular opening 286. The upper side of the first stage 269 forms a stage opening 287 through which a pachinko ball rolling on the first stage 269 can pass (see FIG. 14). Here, when the wall member 245 is assembled to the stage forming member 244, the stage notch 269a of the first stage 269 faces the stage opening 287, and the inflow of the pachinko ball into the stage opening 287 is promoted. ing. Further, the wall member 245 is formed with a passage forming portion 288 that protrudes rearward from the wall member 245 so as to cover the rectangular opening 286 from the rear, and extends vertically inside the passage forming portion 288. A passage (first ball passage) 289 is defined. That is, the vertical passage 289 communicates with the rear horizontal passage 283 on the lower side, and is configured to guide the pachinko ball flowing in from the stage port 287 downward and send it to the rear horizontal passage 283. In addition, the said channel | path formation part 288 has comprised the shape which cut | disconnected the cylinder body vertically in half.

  A pair of vertical passage ribs 290 and 290 projecting upward from the bottom portion are provided at the bottom of the passage forming portion 288 so as to extend in parallel in the front-rear direction, and each vertical passage rib 290 has a corresponding rear horizontal passage. The rib 285 is connected. As shown in FIG. 28, the vertical passage rib 290 is set to have a rear side higher than the rear horizontal passage rib 285 and is inclined downward toward the front. The pachinko balls that have flowed down the vertical passage 289 are guided forward by the vertical passage ribs 290, 290 and sent to the rear horizontal passage 283.

  That is, by assembling the wall member 245 to the stage forming member 244, the vertical passage 289 communicates with the front horizontal passage 259 through the rear horizontal passage 283, and is an L-shaped passage having a substantially L shape in side view. 291 is formed. The pachinko balls that have flowed down the L-shaped passage 291 are discharged from the ball outlet 250 to the game area 32 and are awarded to the upper start winning opening 40a of the start winning device 38 with high probability. In addition, the wall member 245 is positioned by fitting the fixed boss 272c of the stage flange portion 272 to a plurality of boss receiving portions 245a provided so as to sandwich the vertical passage 289 and the rear horizontal passage 283, and positioning the wall member 245. The positioning bosses 273 and 273 of the stage forming member 244 are inserted into the holes 245b and 245b for positioning, and a reliable communication relationship between the rear horizontal passage 283 (vertical passage 289) and the front horizontal passage 259 is achieved. It has become so. When the wall member 245 is assembled to the stage forming member 244, the guide lower protrusion 275 provided on the lower surface of the first stage 269 faces the front side of the vertical passage 289, and the pachinko ball falls straight down the vertical passage 289. (See FIG. 28).

  Here, when the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is assembled to the transparent plate 31, the wall member 245 is configured such that a decorative member 597 fixed to a shutter device 500, which will be described later, abuts from behind. The decorative member 597 is visually recognized from the front side through the member 245. The passage forming portion 288 of the wall member 245 is configured to face a second positioning recess (positioning recess) 605, which will be described later, of the decorative member 597, and the wall member 245 is positioned by the decorative member 597. . Further, the rear ends of the positioning bosses 273 and 273 of the stage forming member 244 protruding from the positioning holes 245b and 245b of the wall member 245 are inserted into positioning insertion holes (boss insertion holes) 606 and 606, which will be described later, of the decorative member 597. (See FIG. 25). As a result, the wall member 245 and the decorative member 597 are securely assembled, and a stronger communication structure of the vertical passage 289 (rear horizontal passage 283) and the front horizontal passage 259 is achieved.

(About the ball passage)
Next, the ball passage portions 274 and 247 provided on the left and right sides of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 will be described. Since the spherical passage portion 274 has a bilaterally symmetric shape, the left spherical passage portion 274 will be described, and the right spherical passage portion 274 will be denoted by the same reference numeral and description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the ball passage portion 274 is composed of a rear passage half body 293 and a front passage half body 294. A warp passage 295 through which a sphere can flow is defined. The rear passage half 293 is formed with a rear protruding piece 296a protruding upward, and a through hole 297a opened in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear protruding piece 296a. Further, the upper bent portion 293b of the rear passage half 293 is subjected to a light diffusion process so that the light arriving at the upper bent portion 293b is diffused and the outside is difficult to see through the upper bent portion 293b. The An inner protrusion 298 that protrudes forward is formed on the rear surface of the rear passage half 293. A surface directed toward the inner side (right side) of the internal protrusion 298 constitutes an internal guide surface 298 a for guiding the pachinko ball to the stage portion 271.

  The front passage half 294 is formed such that a front projection piece 296b having the same shape as the rear projection piece 296a protrudes upward, and a through hole 297b is formed in the front projection piece 296b to open in the front-rear direction. When the rear passage half 293 and the front passage half 294 are assembled, the front and rear protrusions 296a and 296b are aligned to form a passage mounting piece 296, and the front and rear through holes 297a and 297b are aligned. Thus, a fixing through hole 297 is formed (see FIG. 34C). As shown in FIGS. 29B and 30, the passage mounting piece 296 is configured to match the fixed concave portion 265 provided in the fixing piece 263 of the lower frame base member 243 and has a spherical passage portion. The fixing through hole 297 of 274 is configured to align with the concave portion insertion hole 266 provided in the fixing piece 263 when the passage mounting piece 296 faces the fixing concave portion 265.

  In this state, when the front frame member 206 is assembled to the rear frame member 205, the passage fixing boss 234 of the front frame member 206 is inserted through the fixing through hole 297 and the recessed portion insertion hole 266. Yes. Further, the passage fixing boss 234 of the front frame member 206 inserted through the fixing through hole 297 and the concave portion insertion hole 266 is aligned with the ball passage fixing hole 224 of the rear frame member 205, and these through holes 297, 266, 224 are aligned. By screwing the screw into the passage fixing boss 234 via the, the passage attachment piece 296 is sandwiched between the front frame member 206 and the lower frame body 203 (lower frame base member 243), and the ball passage portion 274 is attached. It has become. Note that the lower side of the ball passage portion 274 is screwed to the lower frame 203 via a through hole 294a provided in the front passage half 294 and a through hole 293a provided in the rear passage half 293. ing.

  On the upper left side of the front passage half 294, a semicircular spherical inlet 299 that opens outward (to the left) is formed. The ball inlet 299 opens toward the game area 32 when the ball passage portion 274 is assembled to the frame-shaped decorative body 200, and the pachinko ball flowing down the game area 32 is passed through the ball inlet 299 to the warp path 295. It is configured to be taken in. Further, on the lower right side of the front passage half 294, there is opened a stage outlet 300 through which the pachinko balls flowing down the warp passage 295 pass out to the stage portion 271 (first stage 269). As shown in FIG. 14, the stage outlet 300 faces the left edge of the first stage 269 when the ball passage portion 274 is assembled to the lower frame 203, and opens toward the first stage 269. Configured to do. The outer surface facing the outside of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 in the front passage half 294 is subjected to a light diffusion process, and diffuses the light that has arrived on the outer surface and passes through the outer surface through the outer surface. Is configured to be difficult to see.

(About the production unit)
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the effect unit 201 includes an attachment base 301, an upper light emission effect device 302 (light emission effect device) provided at the center of the attachment base 301, and the upper light emission effect device 302. It is comprised from the movable production | presentation apparatuses 303 and 303 provided in the right and left of the attachment base 301 on both sides. And the production | generation unit 201 is attached to the upper part of the said frame-shaped decorative body 200 in the state which assembled | attached these production apparatuses 302,303,303 integrally.

(About the mounting base)
The mounting base 301 includes a base body 304 and an upper decorative cover (decorative cover) 305 attached to the front side of the base body 304. The base body 304 is formed of a transparent member having a crescent shape, and a plurality of fixing holes 304 a and through holes 304 b for positioning the upper decorative cover 305 are formed in the base body 304. Further, side cover boss receiving portions 306 and 306 having through holes are provided on the left and right front surfaces of the base body 304. The base body 304 is formed with a pair of rectangular case body mounting recesses (mounting openings) 307 and 307 that open upward. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21, semicircular case body boss receiving portions 304 d and 304 d are formed on the rear surface of the case body 304 so as to sandwich the case body mounting recesses 307 from the left and right. In addition, case body support walls 309 and 309 extending rearward are provided on the left and right edges of each case body mounting recess 307.

  A rectangular attachment through hole 304c is provided at a substantially upper central position of the base body 304, and a binding band 310 (see FIG. 24) for attaching the wiring 213a of the ball detection sensor 213 is attached to the attachment through hole 304c. It is supposed to be. As shown in FIG. 37, on the rear surface of the base body 304, a board mounting portion 312 is formed in a rectangular frame shape by a rib protruding rearward, and an effect unit relay board 311 is attached to the board mounting portion 312. .

  As shown in FIG. 38, the effect unit relay board 311 has a large connector receiving portion 313 to which a connector insertion portion 302b of a wiring (a connecting line 302a described later) derived from the upper light emission effect device 302 is connected. (Not shown) is provided with a downward direction. The effect unit relay board 311 includes a left connector receiving portion 314 to which a connector insertion portion 303b of a wiring 303a derived from a left movable effect device 303 (a drive solenoid 369 described later) is connected, and a right movable effect device 303. A right connector receiving portion 315 to which the connector insertion portion 303b of the wiring 303a to be led out is connected is shown (reversely shown in FIG. 38), and both the left and right connector receiving portions 314 and 315 are insertion ports (not shown). Z) is directed downward. In addition, a central connector receiving portion 316 is provided at a substantially central portion of the effect unit relay board 311, and the wiring 201 a of the effect unit 201 is led out from the connector receiving portion 316.

  In addition, the wiring 201a led out from the production unit relay board 311 is gathered together with the wiring 213a of the ball detection sensor 213 as described above, and the back unit 50 is connected to the back unit 50 via the upper central wiring insertion port 71. It is inserted through the back side. And about the connector insertion part 201b of the wiring 201a derived | led-out from the production | presentation unit 201, it is connected to the upper left LED board 91 of the upper left light emission decoration device 90 mentioned later. The upper left LED board 91 is connected to the relay board 702 of the middle frame 12, and the effect unit relay board 311 is electrically connected to the control device 700 via the upper left LED board 91 and the relay board 702. The Rukoto. In other words, each effect device (the upper light emission effect device 302 and the movable effect devices 303 and 303) of the effect unit 201 is controlled to emit light and operate by the control device 700.

  The upper decorative cover 305 is subjected to light diffusion treatment by unevenness on substantially the entire rear surface, and light from a central light emitting decorative device 167 (described later) provided on the back unit 50 passes through the base body 304 and is upper. The decorative cover 305 is irradiated and the cover 305 is brightened. The upper decorative cover 305 includes a left cover body 317, an intermediate cover body 319, and a right cover body 318, and each cover body 317, 318, 319 is attached to the front surface of the base body 304. Note that the left cover body 317 and the right cover body 318 have a symmetrical shape, and therefore, in the following description, the left cover body 317 will be described, and the right cover body 318 will be denoted by the same reference numerals. Description is omitted. As shown in FIG. 21, the middle cover body 319 is provided with a fixed protrusion 319 a that protrudes backward, and the fixed protrusion 319 a is fitted into the corresponding fixing hole 304 a of the base body 304, so that the intermediate cover body 319 is The base body 304 is positioned. Further, a screw hole 319b that is aligned with a corresponding through hole 304b of the base body 304 is provided on the rear surface of the middle cover body 319, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the screw hole 319b through the through hole of the base body 304. ) Is screwed in, so that the intermediate cover body 319 can be attached to the base body 304.

  The front surface of the middle cover body 319 is formed in a stepped shape that retreats stepwise from above to below. In addition, an effect device fixing portion 320 that protrudes forward is formed at a position biased toward the lower edge portion (one edge portion of the mounting base 301) on the front surface of the middle cover body 319. The effect device fixing portion 320 is formed in a substantially T shape, and the center portion of the effect device fixing portion 320 projects downward. In addition, the installation surface 321 forming the front surface of the rendering device fixing unit 320 is inclined backward from above to below (one edge of the mounting base 301). The installation surface 321 is formed with three boss receiving holes (boss holes) 321a having through holes, and the boss receiving holes 321a have an inverted triangular arrangement.

  A protruding attachment portion 322 that protrudes forward is formed on the front upper portion of the middle cover body 319. The projecting dimension of the projecting mounting portion 322 matches the depth of cut of the mounting recess 226 of the rear frame member 205, and the left and right extending lengths of the projecting mounting portion 322 are slightly smaller than the left and right widths of the mounting recess 226. The protrusion mounting portion 322 is configured to face the inside of the mounting recess 226. Further, the upper edge portion of the projecting mounting portion 322 is formed so as to substantially coincide with the rear end edge of the upper outer peripheral wall 225 forming the mounting recess 226, and when the projecting mounting portion 322 faces the mounting recess 226. In addition, the upper end portion of the projecting mounting portion 322 extends along the rear end edge of the upper outer peripheral wall 225.

  As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of fixing holes 322a are provided on the front surface of the projecting mounting portion 322, and the corresponding mounting holes 322a are provided in the mounting recesses 226 (upper outer peripheral wall 225) of the rear frame member 205. The fixing protrusion 225a is inserted, and the middle cover body 319 (effect unit 201) is positioned. Further, a plurality of through holes 322b are provided on the front surface of the projecting mounting portion 322 so as to align with the respective screw holes 225b provided in the mounting recess 226 of the rear frame member 205, and screws provided in the mounting recess 226 through the through holes 322b. By screwing a screw (not shown) into the hole 225b, the middle cover body 319 (effect unit 201) is attached to the rear frame member 205 (frame-shaped decorative body 200). A second outlet notch 322c is formed at the upper edge of the projecting mounting portion 322. When the middle cover body 319 is attached to the rear frame member 205 as shown in FIG. The notch 322c is configured to be aligned with the first outlet notch 227 of the rear frame member 205 to form the wiring outlet / outlet 323. In addition, the light diffusion process in the vertical direction is performed on the flat surface portion of the protrusion mounting portion 322 so that it is brightened by the light irradiated from the back unit 50 side.

  As shown in FIG. 35, middle regulation ribs 319c projecting forward are provided on the upper edge of the front surface of the middle cover body 319 on the left and right sides of the projecting mounting portion 322, and the middle cover body 319 is attached to the rear frame member 205. When attached to the middle cover body 319, the middle regulating rib 319c abuts against the inner circumferential surface of the upper outer circumferential wall 225, so that the middle cover body 319 is stably attached. As shown in FIG. 21, the rear surface of the middle cover body 319 is provided in a substantially rectangular shape so as to surround the screw hole 319b and the fixing protrusion 319a provided in the middle cover body 319 by a rib protruding rearward. A rear contact portion 324 is formed. The rear contact portion 324 is configured to contact the front surface of the base body 304 when the middle cover body 319 is attached to the base body 304. Further, a band notch 324a is formed in a rib that defines the upper portion of the rear abutting portion 324. When the middle cover body 319 is attached to the base body 304, it is provided in the attachment through hole 304c of the base body 304. The binding band 310 faces (see FIG. 24). The ribs defining the upper part of the rear abutting portion 324 are subjected to a light diffusion process in the vertical direction so that the light from the back unit 50 is diffused and brightened.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the left cover body 317 is provided with a fixing protrusion 317a protruding rearward from the rear surface, and the fixing protrusion 317a is fitted into the corresponding fixing hole 304a of the base body 304, so A cover body 317 is configured to be positioned on the base body 304. Further, an inner fixed boss 317b having a screw hole on the rear surface of the left cover body 317 is protruded rearward by a predetermined length, and a screw hole is formed on the outer surface (left side) of the inner fixed boss 317b on the rear surface. The provided outer fixed boss 317c is protruded rearward with a shorter length than the inner fixed boss 317b. The inner fixed boss 317b is configured such that a rear end thereof is fitted to the side cover boss receiving portion 306 of the base body 304, and the inner fixed boss 317b is inserted through the through hole of the side cover boss receiving portion 306. A screw (not shown) is screwed into the screw hole. The outer fixed boss 317c is aligned with a through hole 304b provided at the left end of the base body 304 and abuts on the front surface of the base body 304, and the outer fixed boss 317c is interposed through the through hole 304b of the base body 304. A screw is screwed into the screw hole 317c. Then, by fixing the outer fixed boss 317c and the inner fixed boss 317b with screws, the left cover body 317 is fixed to the base body 304 in a state where substantially the entire rear surface of the left cover body 317 is spaced forward from the base body 304. It can be mounted on. Accordingly, the front surface of the left cover body 317 excluding the projecting mounting portion 322 and the front surface of the middle cover body 319 are configured to be flush with each other (see FIG. 36).

  Further, a fixing hole 317d is provided on the upper edge side of the left cover body 317, and a corresponding fixing protrusion 225a provided on the upper outer peripheral wall 225 of the rear frame member 205 is fitted into the fixing hole 317d, so that the left cover body 317d is fitted. 317 (effect unit 201) is configured to be positioned on the rear frame member 205. Further, a plurality of through holes 317e are formed on the upper edge side of the left cover body 317 so as to align with the screw holes 225b provided in the upper outer peripheral wall 225 of the rear frame member 205, and the upper outer peripheral wall 225 is formed through the through holes 317e. The left cover body 317 (effect unit 201) is attached to the rear frame member 205 by screwing a screw into the screw hole 225b. The upper edge of the left cover body 317 is shaped along the rear end edge of the upper outer peripheral wall 225, and the upper edge of the left cover body 317 is attached when the left cover body 317 is attached to the upper outer peripheral wall 225. Is configured to contact and align with the rear edge of the upper outer peripheral wall 225. Further, a side regulating rib 317f is provided on the front surface of the left cover body 317 so as to protrude forward, and when the left cover body 317 is attached to the rear frame member 205, the side regulating rib 317f is disposed on the upper outer peripheral wall 225. The left cover body 317 is stably attached in contact with the inner peripheral surface. That is, the effect unit 201 is attached to the frame-shaped decorative body 200 by fixing the upper decorative cover 305 to the upper outer peripheral wall 225. Note that the front surface of the left cover body 317 is formed in a stepped shape so as to recede in stages from the top to the bottom, similarly to the middle cover body 319.

(About the top lighting effect device)
As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the upper light emitting effect device 302 includes a device main body 325 attached to the attachment base 301, a circular transparent panel (transparent panel) 326 disposed in the device main body 325, and An effect cover member (cover member) 327 that is attached to the apparatus main body 325 and covers the circular transparent panel 326 from the front side is basically configured to perform various light emission effects depending on the gaming state. The apparatus main body 325 includes a disk-shaped base member (base member) 328 fixed to the mounting base 301, and a light passage member 329 provided on the front side of the disk-shaped base member 328. In addition, the apparatus main body 325 is provided with a first light emitting unit 330 that emits light forward and a second light emitting unit 331 that emits light laterally.

(About disc-shaped base members)
The disc-shaped base member 328 has a receiving wall portion 333 standing from the outer periphery of the disc-shaped base substrate 332 to the front, and a fitting receiving portion 334 is defined inside. Three base fixing bosses (fixing bosses) 335 are provided on the rear surface of the base substrate 332 so as to protrude rearward by a predetermined length. These three base fixing bosses 335 are arranged so as to be biased toward the upper edge (one edge) on the rear surface of the base substrate 332, and each base fixing boss 335 is an effect of the middle cover body 319. It corresponds to each boss receiving hole 321a provided in the apparatus fixing portion 320. That is, the three base fixing bosses 335 are arranged in an inverted triangle shape in the upper half region on the rear surface of the base substrate 332. Then, each base fixing boss 335 is fitted into the corresponding boss receiving hole 321a of the effect device fixing portion 320 and screwed from behind, so that the disk-shaped base member 328 is attached to the inner cover body 319 (attachment base 301). It is supposed to be.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 41, the rear surface of the base substrate 332 is separated from the installation surface 321 of the rendering device fixing portion 320 by the protruding length of the base fixing boss 335, and the rear surface and the installation surface of the base substrate 332 are separated. A wiring space 336 is defined between the wirings 321 and 321. In addition, since the installation surface 321 of the effect device fixing portion 320 is inclined, the disc-shaped base member 328 attached to the effect device fixing portion 320 is inclined rearward from the upper side to the lower side, and the disk-shaped base. The lower side of the member 328 protrudes downward from the middle cover body 319 (mounting base 301). That is, the upper light emitting effect device 302 is fixed to the effect device fixing portion 320 with the substantially lower half of the rear surface of the base substrate 332 facing the rear of the mounting base 301 (see FIGS. 38 and 41).

  Three outer boss receiving portions (boss receiving portions) 337 projecting outward are provided on the outer surface of the receiving wall portion 333, and these outer boss receiving portions 337 are non-regular triangles with respect to the disc-shaped base member 328. Arranged in shape. In addition, a guide recess 338 extending in the front-rear direction on the front side of the outer boss receiving portion 337 is formed in a portion corresponding to each outer boss receiving portion 337 in the accommodation wall portion 333. Two internal fixing bosses 332 a and 332 a having screw holes are provided on the front surface of the base substrate 332 so as to protrude forward at positions close to the housing wall 333. In addition, on the front surface of the base substrate 332, connection ribs 332b are formed so as to connect the respective internal fixing bosses 332a and the inner peripheral surface of the accommodation wall portion 333. Further, two positioning protrusions 332c and 332c are provided on the front surface of the base substrate 332 so as to protrude forward, and the base substrate 332 has a plurality of connector openings 339 that open in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 42, four light source holding portions 340 are provided on the inner peripheral surface of the accommodating wall portion 333 of the disk-shaped base member 328. Each light source holding portion 340 is formed by a pair of holding pieces 340a and 340a that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, and a rear portion of a side light emitting LED substrate 343 (described later) is accommodated and held between the holding pieces 340a and 340a. It has become. The light source holding portions 340 are arranged at equal intervals on the inner peripheral surface of the housing wall portion 333 at equal intervals, and the upper and lower light source holding portions 340 and 340 and the left and right light source holding portions 340 and 340 are arranged to face each other. Yes.

  The first light emitting means 330 is accommodated in the fitting accommodating portion 334 of the disk-shaped base member 328. The first light emitting means 330 includes a front light emitting LED substrate (first light emitter substrate) 341 and a plurality of character LEDs (light emitters) 342 disposed on the LED substrate 341. The outer shape of the front light emitting LED board 341 is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the housing wall 333, and the front light emitting LED board 341 is disposed in the fitting housing part 334 in an aligned state. It is like that. Further, the rear surface of the front light emitting LED substrate 341 is in contact with the front surface of the base substrate 332. The front light emitting LED substrate 341 is provided with a substrate positioning hole 341a corresponding to the positioning protrusion 332c of the disk-shaped base member 328, and the positioning protrusion 332c is fitted into the substrate positioning hole 341a so that the front light emitting LED substrate 341 is a disc-shaped base. It is configured to be positioned on member 328. In addition, two U-shaped recesses 341b are formed in the front light emitting LED board 341. When the front light emitting LED board 341 is accommodated in the fitting housing portion 334, the internal fixing boss of the disk-shaped base member 328 is accommodated in the U-shaped recess 341b. The front light emitting LED board 341 is positioned on the disk-shaped base member 328 with the 332a and the connecting rib 332b facing each other. The character LED 342 disposed on the front light emitting LED board 341 emits light forward, and a plurality of character LEDs 342 are arranged on the front light emitting LED board 341 in a required arrangement manner. Specifically, when the light passage member 329 is disposed on the disk-like base member 328 on the front light emitting LED substrate 341, the character LED 342 is inserted into each receiving hole portion 357 described later of the light passage member 329. (See FIG. 45). However, the character LED 342 is not provided in the portion corresponding to the portion where the accommodation hole portion 357 intersects in the front light emitting LED substrate 341, and as will be described later, the characters “heaven” are drawn one by one (accommodation hole). When light is emitted (for each portion 357), it is possible to prevent light from entering the other part (the other accommodation hole 357) through the intersection.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the rear surface of the front light emitting LED board 341 is positioned below the two first relay line connector receivers 341c and 341c and between the first relay line connector receivers 341c and 341c. A connecting wire connector receiving portion 341d is provided to protrude rearward. As shown in FIG. 43, when the first relay line connector receiving portions 341c, 341c and the connection line connector receiving portion 341d receive the front light emitting LED board 341 in the fitting receiving portion 334, the base substrate 332 is provided. It protrudes from the rear surface of the base substrate 332 through the connector opening 339 provided in the base plate 332. Here, as shown in FIG. 38, the connection line connector receiving portion 341d is configured to face a portion projecting downward from the mounting base 301 on the rear surface of the base substrate 332, and the connection line connector receiving portion 341d. A connector insertion portion 302b of a connecting line (wiring) 302a for connecting the front light emitting LED board 341 and the effect unit relay board 311 is connected to the board.

  The light source holder 340 accommodates and holds the rear portion of the side light emitting LED substrate (second light emitter substrate) 343 of the second light emitting means 331. Each side-emitting LED substrate 343 is provided with one panel LED 344 that emits light laterally (in a direction parallel to the base substrate 332). The panel LEDs 344 installed in each light source holding part 340 are such that the upper and lower panel LEDs 344 and 344 face each other, and the left and right panel LEDs 344 and 344 face each other, and all the panel LEDs 344, 344, Light is irradiated in a cross shape by 344 and 344. Each side light emitting LED substrate 343 is provided with a second relay line connector receiving portion 343a. As shown in FIG. 43, the connector receiving portion 343a passes through a connector opening 339 provided in the base substrate 332. It faces the rear surface of the base substrate 332. Further, the first relay line connector receiving portion 341c and the second relay line connector receiving portion 343a are connected to the front light emitting LED substrate 341 and the side light emitting LED substrate 343, respectively, through a connector of a relay line (wiring) 302c. The insertion part 302d is connected.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 43, the connection line 302 a and the relay line 302 c are wound around the base fixing bosses 335, 335, 335 of the base substrate 332 so as to be gathered on the upper rear side of the base substrate 332. It has become. In this state, the disk-shaped base member 328 (upper light emitting effect device 302) is attached to the effect device fixing portion 320 of the attachment base 301, so that the connecting wire wound around the base fixing boss 335 as shown in FIG. 302 a and the relay line 302 c are held in a state where they are accommodated in the wiring space 336. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41, the connecting line 302a is led out from the rear surface of the base substrate 332 facing the lower side of the mounting base 301 to the rear of the mounting base 301, so that the connector insertion portion 302b of the connecting line 302a The production unit relay board 311 is connected to the large connector receiving portion 313 from below. As described above, the rendering unit relay board 311 is electrically connected to the control device 700 via the relay board 702 of the middle frame 12. Therefore, the light emission of the character LED 342 and the panel LED 344 is controlled by the control device 700.

  As shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, the light passage member 329 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular wall portion 355 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the circular holding substrate 345, and is entirely formed. White light reflection treatment is applied. The outer peripheral surface of the circular wall portion 355 is formed along the inner peripheral surface of the storage wall portion 333 of the disk-shaped base member 328, and the light passage member 329 is in the fitting storage portion 334 of the disk-shaped base member 328. Are accommodated in a state in which most of them are fitted. The holding substrate 345 has a through hole 345a that is aligned with the internal fixing boss 332a of the disk-shaped base member 328, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the internal fixing boss 332a through the through hole 345a. Thus, the light passing member 329 is attached to the disk-shaped base member 328.

  The circular wall portion 355 is formed with two positioning notches 355a cut forward from the rear end edge, and is positioned when the light passage member 329 is fitted into the fitting housing portion 334. The connection rib 332b of the disk-shaped base member 328 faces the notch 355a, and the light passage member 329 is positioned on the disk-shaped base member 328. Further, the circular wall portion 355 has a rear edge of the circular wall portion 355 (a rear portion of the light passage member 329) when the light passage member 329 is fitted into the fitting housing portion 334. (Refer to the circles in FIG. 41). Thereby, the front light emitting LED substrate 341 is held in the fitting housing portion 334 while being sandwiched between the base substrate 332 and the circular wall portion 355 of the disk-shaped base member 328.

  On the outer peripheral surface of the circular wall portion 355, four wall surface concave portions 355b that are opened rearward are provided so as to prevent interference with the light source holding portion 340. In addition, a U-shaped light source accommodating portion 356 that opens rearward is formed at a location corresponding to each wall surface concave portion 355b in the circular wall portion 355 (the outer surface of the light passage member 329). The light source accommodating portion 356 is configured such that the light source accommodating portion 356 accommodates the front side of the side light emitting LED substrate 343 when the light passage member 329 is fitted into the fitting accommodating portion 334. That is, the side light emitting LED substrate 343 is accommodated and held in a state of being sandwiched from the front and rear by the light source holding part 340 and the light source accommodation part 356 (see FIG. 41). When the side light emitting LED substrate 343 is accommodated in the light source accommodating portion 356, the panel LED 344 projects forward from the front surface of the holding substrate 345.

  The light passage member 329 is formed with a plurality of receiving holes 357 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The accommodation hole portion 357 includes a light passage hole 358 provided in the holding substrate 345 and a light guide wall 359 protruding rearward from the entire circumference of the opening edge of the light passage hole 358, and includes a plurality of accommodation hole portions. Due to 357, “heaven” characters (a plurality of characters) are formed on substantially the entire holding substrate 345. That is, each accommodation hole 357 is provided corresponding to each stroke of the character “heaven”. The inner side surface of the light guide wall 359 is subjected to white light reflection processing so that light can pass through brightly. As shown in FIG. 41, the rearward projection amount of the light guide wall 359 is set smaller than the circular wall portion 355, and the light guide member 329 is inserted into the fitting housing portion 334 when the light guide member 329 is fitted. The rear edge of the wall 359 is configured to be slightly spaced forward from the front light emitting LED board 341.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 45, the character LED 342 is arranged on the front light emitting LED substrate 341 along the accommodation hole 357. When the light passage member 329 is fitted into the fitting housing portion 334, as shown in FIG. 41, the opening front end edge 358a that defines the light passage hole 358 of the holding substrate 345 has a front light emitting LED substrate 341. Positioned further forward, the character LED 342 is housed in the housing hole 357 (light guide wall 359) so as to be surrounded from the front side. As a result, the light from the LED for character 342 is guided forward by the light guide wall 359, and light having a shape matching the opening contour of the light passage hole 358 is irradiated forward. That is, the light of the LED 342 for characters passes through the light passage member 329, and is aligned with the shape of the “heaven” character formed by the accommodation hole portion 357, and passes through the light passage member 329. . In addition, the accommodation hole portion 357 serves to prevent other light from entering the accommodation hole portion 357 by accommodating the character LED 342 from the front side by the light guide wall 359.

  Here, the control device 700 that controls the light emission of the character LED 342 is configured to be able to control the light emission for each character LED 342 accommodated in each of the accommodation holes 357, and the character of “heaven” is displayed for each stroke. It is possible to emit light. Therefore, by accommodating the character LED 342 from the front side by the accommodating hole 357, the character LED 342 accommodated in the other accommodating hole 357 is accommodated in the accommodating hole 357 that accommodates the character LED 342 that does not emit light. The light is prevented from entering. In addition, as described above, the character LED 342 is not provided at a portion where the receiving hole portion 357 intersects, so that light enters the other receiving hole portion 357 via the intersecting portion and blurs at the intersecting portion. And the spread light is not irradiated.

  The light passage member 329 includes an annular holding wall portion 360 erected forward from the front surface of the holding substrate 345, and an accommodation recess 361 is formed inside the holding wall portion 360. The holding wall portion 360 is provided slightly inside the outer peripheral surface of the circular wall portion 355, and when the light passage member 329 is fitted into the fitting housing portion 334, the holding wall portion 360 is the panel LED 344. It is designed to be located inside. In addition, a panel cutout 360 a is formed at a required portion of the holding wall 360. Furthermore, a light passage hole 362 that opens in the radial direction of the holding wall portion 360 is formed at a position corresponding to each light source housing portion 356 in the holding wall portion 360, and the panel LED 344 is formed through the light passage hole 362. Light is allowed to pass into the housing recess 361 (see FIG. 41).

  A light reflecting sheet 363 is accommodated in the accommodating recess 361. The light reflecting sheet 363 has a shape substantially coinciding with the inner peripheral surface of the holding wall 360 and is accommodated in the accommodating recess 361 in an aligned state. The light reflecting sheet 363 transmits the light passing through the light passage member 329 as it is, and reflects part of the light from the panel LED 344 to irradiate the circular light forward. The circular transparent panel 326 is accommodated on the front side of the light reflecting sheet 363 in the accommodating recess 361. On the rear surface of the circular transparent panel 326, a required pattern is drawn by forming minute irregularities, and light introduced from the side end surface into the circular transparent panel 326 is reflected by the minute irregularities representing the pattern. By doing so, the light of the design is irradiated forward. In addition, the said pattern is a concept including a figure, a pattern, a pattern, etc. As shown in FIG. 40, in an Example, this panel 326 itself circle | round | yen by the several unevenness | corrugation provided in the whole rear surface of the circular transparent panel 326 is shown. The shape is formed as a design. Then, the light emitted from the panel LED 344 is reflected by the plurality of projections and depressions, and the circular light along the shape of the circular transparent panel 326 is irradiated forward.

  Here, various methods such as a laser engraving method can be used as the pattern forming method. For example, by forming a printing pattern consisting of ink irregularities by printing on the surface of a printing substrate, forming a transparent panel using a molding die on which the printing substrate having this printing pattern is arranged, and from the obtained transparent panel By peeling the printing substrate and the printing pattern, it is possible to adopt a method of forming a pattern composed of irregularities formed by transferring irregularities with ink on the surface. In addition, a protrusion pattern for transfer with a transparent ultraviolet curable resin and a printing ink layer for transfer applied to the convex pattern are formed on the surface of the film, and the convex printing ink layer is arranged facing the cavity. It is also possible to adopt a method of forming a design on the surface by transferring a printing ink layer with an ultraviolet curable resin by forming a transparent panel by in-mold molding using a mold and peeling the film from the obtained transparent panel. .

  The circular transparent panel 326 is configured to transmit light that has passed through the light passage member 329 to the front as it is. The circular transparent panel 326 is formed in a shape substantially coinciding with the inner peripheral surface of the holding wall portion 360, and the circular transparent panel 326 is received by being fitted in the receiving recess 361. As shown in FIG. 41, each panel LED 344 is configured to face the side end surface of the circular transparent panel 326 fitted in the housing recess 361 via the light passage hole 362. That is, when the panel LED 344 emits light, the light of the panel LED 344 enters the side end surface of the circular transparent panel 326 through the light passage hole 362.

  Here, the thickness dimension of the circular transparent panel 326 is set to be substantially the same as the protruding height of the holding wall 360, and as shown in FIG. 46, the circular transparent panel 326 fitted in the receiving recess 361 The front end surface is aligned with the front end edge of the holding wall 360 at substantially the same height. Further, the circular transparent panel 326 is provided with a panel protrusion 326a protruding from the outer peripheral edge, and the panel protrusion 326a is provided on the holding wall 360 when the circular transparent panel 326 is fitted into the receiving recess 361. The circular transparent panel 326 is positioned so as to face the panel cutout 360a.

  The effect cover member 327 performs light emission by projecting light onto the front surface (cover front surface 365) of the cover body portion 364 having a hemispherical shape that bulges forward. The cover front surface 365 is a half mirror with a matte finish, and allows light from the rear to pass therethrough and makes a member located behind (such as the light passage member 329) invisible. The light reflected from the circular transparent panel 326 is transmitted to the cover front surface 365 and a light circle is projected onto the cover front surface 365, and the light that has passed through the receiving hole 357 of the light passage member 329 is transmitted. Then, the cover front surface 365 is configured to project a shape corresponding to the receiving hole portion 357 (that is, the letter “heaven”) (see FIG. 47). The cover front surface 365 is provided with a required decorative pattern to improve aesthetics.

  An outer edge decorative portion 366 extending outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the cover main body portion 364 (the outer edge portion of the cover member), and a positioning fixing boss (fixed boss) 366a is formed on the rear surface of the outer edge decorative portion 366. Three are formed. These positioning fixing bosses 366a are not visible from the front side by the outer edge decoration portion 366. Then, the presentation cover member 327 is attached to the disk-shaped base member 328 by fitting the rear end of each positioning fixing boss 366a to the corresponding outer boss receiving portion 337 of the disk-shaped base member 328 and screwing it. It has become. The positioning and fixing boss 366a is configured such that the side surface of the positioning and fixing boss 366a is brought into contact with and guided by the guide recess 338 of the disk-like base member 328 when the effect cover member 327 is assembled to the disk-like base member 328. The The effect cover member 327 is positioned on the disc-shaped base member 328 by being screwed to the outer boss receiving portion 337 with the positioning fixing boss 366 a facing the guide recess 338.

  Here, the positioning fixing boss 366a and the outer boss receiving portion 337 are arranged in a non-regular triangle shape, and the effect cover member 327 is always assembled to the disk-shaped base member 328 in an appropriate manner. . A plurality of cover positioning projections 366b are formed on the rear surface of the outer edge decoration portion 366 in a protruding manner. When the effect cover member 327 is assembled to the disk-shaped base member 328, the cover positioning projection 366b abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the housing wall 333 of the disk-shaped base member 328, and the effect cover member 327 is made to be the disk-shaped base member. 328 is configured for positioning.

  The cover main body 364 is formed with an annular contact rib 367 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge. The annular abutment rib 367 has a circular shape that coincides with the housing wall 333 of the disc-shaped base member 328, and when the effect cover member 327 is assembled to the disc-like base member 328, the annular abutment rib 367. The rear end edge of 367 is in contact with the front end edge of the housing wall 333 so that the effect cover member 327 is stably attached (see FIG. 41). A plurality of contact pressing portions (contact portions) 368 are provided on the rear surface of the cover main body portion 364. As shown in FIG. 46, the abutment pressing portion 368 includes the front end surface of the circular transparent panel 326 and the holding wall portion 360 that are aligned on the same surface when the production cover member 327 is assembled to the disk-shaped base member 328. The circular transparent panel 326 is configured to be sandwiched between the effect cover member 327 and the light passage member 329 by contacting the front end edge of the circular transparent panel 326. In addition, the holding wall portion 360 of the light passage member 329 comes into contact with the contact pressing portion 368, so that the light passage member 329 is held in the fitting housing portion 334 of the disk-shaped base member 328.

(About movable production equipment)
Next, the movable effect device 303 will be described. Since the left and right movable effect devices 303 and 303 have a symmetrical shape (the box-shaped case body 370 described later has the same configuration), in the following description, the left movable effect device 303 will be described, and the right movable effect device 303 will be described. About each member of the production device 303, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the movable effect device 303 includes a box-shaped case body 370 that houses a drive solenoid 369, an operation member 371 that is operated by the drive solenoid 369, and a connection to the operation member 371. It is basically composed of the tufted body 372 (see FIG. 48B) and a case front cover 373 covering the front side of the box-shaped case body 370.

  The box-shaped case body 370 is formed in a box shape from an upper case portion 374 and a lower case portion 375, and both are assembled by being screwed. The box-shaped case body 370 has a cross-sectional shape that matches the case body mounting recess 307 of the base body 304. Also, fixing flange portions 375a and 375a are provided on both sides of the lower case portion 375 so as to protrude outward, and the box-shaped case body 370 faces the case body mounting recess 307, The movable effect device 303 can be attached to the base body 304 by fitting both the fixing flange portions 375a and 375a to the case body boss receiving portions 304d and 304d of the base body 304 from behind and screwing them. ing. At this time, both side portions of the box-shaped case body 370 are in contact with the case body support walls 309 and 309 of the base body 304 so that the box-shaped case body 370 is supported. Further, as shown in FIG. 36, the box-shaped case body 370 protrudes forward and backward from the base body 304 (attachment base 301) while being attached to the base body 304. When the frame-shaped decorative body 200 to which the effect unit 201 is attached is assembled to the transparent plate 31, the rear end portion of the box-shaped case body 370 (drive solenoid 369) is the solenoid insertion port 74 ( The movable effect device 303 is prevented from interfering with the back unit 50 at a later time.

  A plurality of heat radiation holes 376 are formed in the upper case part 374 and the lower case part 375, and heat generated from the drive solenoid 369 is released through the heat radiation holes 376. As shown in FIG. 37, below the lower case portion 375, a movable body wiring through hole 375b through which a wiring (wiring of the movable effect device) 303a led out from the driving solenoid 369 is opened is provided. The wiring 303a led out from the lead is led out to the outside of the case through the movable body wiring through hole 375b. As shown in FIG. 38, the wiring 303a led out via the movable body wiring through hole 375b is routed sideways along the rear surface of the base body 304, and the connector insertion portion 303b of the wiring 303a is inserted. Is connected to the left connector receiving portion 314 of the effect unit relay board 311, and the drive solenoid 369 is electrically connected to the control device 700.

  Similarly for the right movable effect device 303, the wiring 303a led out via the movable body wiring through hole 375b is routed sideways along the rear surface of the base body 304, and the connector of the wiring 303a is inserted. The part 303b is connected to the right connector receiving part 315 of the effect unit relay board 311. That is, the wirings 303a and 303a led out from the both movable effect devices 303 and 303 are made invisible from the front side by being routed around the rear surface of the effect unit 201.

  The front surface of the lower case portion 375 is open, and a rectangular arm opening 377 is formed on the front surface of the box-shaped case body 370. Further, a cover boss 378 is provided on the front side of the lower surface of the lower case portion 375 so as to protrude downward, and a cover positioning hole 379 is provided on the front surface of the upper case portion 374. The drive solenoid 369 accommodated in the box-shaped case body 370 includes a plunger 369 a that reciprocates in the front-rear direction, and the plunger 369 a is connected to the operating member 371. The actuating member 371 has a swing shaft 371a extending in the vertical direction in a shaft hole 374a (only the shaft hole 374a of the upper case portion 374 is shown in FIG. 48A) provided in the upper and lower case portions 374 and 375. The operating member 371 is supported so as to swing in the horizontal direction inside the box-shaped case body 370. Further, the operating member 371 is provided with an arm portion 380 extending forward from the inside of the box-shaped case body 370 through the arm opening 377, and the arm member 380 is configured such that the operating member 371 swings. The arm opening 377 is configured to reciprocate left and right. Further, the operation member 371 is provided with a movement restricting piece 381 projecting sideways, and when the actuating member 371 swings, the movement restricting piece 381 abuts against the inner surface of the lower case portion 375 to operate. It is comprised so that the further rocking | fluctuation of the member 371 may be controlled.

  The tufted body 372 attached to the tip of the arm unit 380 is composed of a pair of tufts formed by bundling a plurality of strings, and the tuft of the tufted body 372 swings left and right as the arm unit 380 reciprocates. This is a directing effect. The case front cover 373 provided so as to cover the front surface of the box-shaped case body 370 is, for example, a decorative plate colored in gold or the like, and a cover boss receiving portion 373a is provided on the rear surface of the case front cover 373. (See FIG. 37). Then, the cover boss 378 of the lower case portion 375 is fitted and screwed to the cover boss receiving portion 373a of the case front cover 373, so that the case front cover 373 becomes the lower case portion 375 (box-like case body 370). ) Is positioned and attached. In addition, as shown in FIG. 37, a vertical protrusion 382 is provided on the rear surface of the case front cover 373, and the vertical protrusion 382 is inserted into the cover positioning hole 379 of the upper case 374. The front cover 373 is configured to be positioned on the upper case portion 374. Furthermore, the case front cover 373 is provided with an arm insertion port 383 through which the arm portion 380 is inserted, and the arm portion 380 is allowed to reciprocate.

(About the back unit)
As shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 9, or FIG. 10, the back unit 50 is formed at a box-shaped main body 51 formed in a rectangular box shape that opens forward, and an opening front end portion of the box-shaped main body 51. The fixing portion 54, 55, 56, 57 extends outside the opening of the box-shaped main body 51 and contacts the rear surface of the transparent plate 31, and the outer shape of the fixing portions 54, 55, 56, 57 is The transparent plate 31 is formed in a size and shape substantially matching the outer shape of the transparent plate 31. Specifically, the box-shaped main body 51 includes a facing surface portion 52 formed in a rectangular plate shape facing the transparent plate 31, and an image wall extending forward from the upper, lower, left and right edges of the facing surface portion 52. The fixed portions are formed so as to open forward from the portions 53a, 53b, 53c, 53d and extend from the front end portions of the respective image wall portions 53a, 53b, 53c, 53d toward the outside of the opening of the box-shaped main body 51. Portions 54, 55, 56, and 57 are formed. The fixing portions 54, 55, 56, 57 are formed with fitting protrusions 59 protruding forward corresponding to the fitting holes 31 d of the transparent plate 31, and correspond to the screw holes 31 e of the transparent plate 31. Through holes 59a that open in the front-rear direction are formed. By inserting each insertion protrusion 59 into the corresponding insertion hole 31d and screwing a screw inserted through the through-hole 59a into the screw hole 31e, the transparent plate 31 is inserted. The back unit 50 is fixed to constitute the game board 30. In the embodiment, the back unit 50 is formed of a black synthetic resin material to prevent light from leaking from the inside of the back unit 50 and to visually recognize the back side of the back unit 50. It is configured not to get.

  Here, the thickness dimension of the transparent plate 31 according to the embodiment is set to approximately 10 mm as described above, and the thickness dimension of the fixing portions 54, 55, 56, and 57 is set to approximately 9 mm. The total thickness of the edge portion at 30 is configured to be approximately 19 mm. That is, the thickness dimension of the game board 30 (the transparent plate 31 and the fixing portions 54, 55, 56, 57) according to the embodiment is the same as the thickness dimension (approximately 19 mm) of the conventional game board 30 formed of wood such as veneer. The game board 30 according to the embodiment can be installed in the game board holding part 24 without changing the structure of the game board holding part 24 of the middle frame 12 and the rotary holders 25a and 25a. It has become. In the following description, the image wall portions corresponding to the upper, lower, left and right edges of the facing surface portion 52 are referred to as an upper image wall portion 53a, a lower image wall portion 53b, a left image wall portion 53c, and a right image wall portion 53d. The fixing portions corresponding to the upper, lower, left and right image wall portions 53a, 53b, 53c, and 53d are referred to as an upper fixing portion 54, a lower fixing portion 55, a left fixing portion 56, and a right fixing portion 57, respectively. To do. Here, as shown in FIG. 6, the box-shaped main body 51 is located below the ball tank 26 provided in the middle frame 12 with the game board 30 installed in the game board holding part 24. The upper fixing portion 54 is positioned on the front side of the ball tank 26 so that the vertical height of the game board 30 is increased. Further, the left fixing portion 56 and the right fixing portion 57 are stepped portions 56a and 57a that fix first fixing walls 187 of illumination means 172 and 179 (described later) constituting the side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177, respectively. Are formed respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the vicinity of the left and right image wall portions 53c and 53d in the facing surface portion 52, the side light emitting effect device is provided at a plurality of locations (four locations in the embodiment) spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. Support bosses 86a and 87a for fixing the illumination means 172 and 179 constituting the 170 and 177 are formed so as to protrude rearward. In the following description, the support boss located in the vicinity of the left image wall portion 53c in the facing surface portion 52 is referred to as a left support boss 86a, and is positioned in the vicinity of the right image wall portion 53d in the facing surface portion 52. Of the support bosses, three located on the lower side are designated as first right support bosses 87a, and one located on the top is designated as second right support boss 113. The left support bosses 86a face a first substrate housing space 86 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, and the first and second right support bosses 87a, 113 are provided in a second substrate housing space 87 (described later). 82). In addition, a ground metal fitting 58 to which a ground wire (not shown) connected to the shutter device 500 is connected is provided on the outer surface of the right drawing wall portion 53d. When the game board 30 is disposed, the grounding metal 58 can come into contact with the metallic right frame member 23 of the middle frame 12 to be grounded.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10 or 12, the opening 52 a that opens in the front-rear direction is opened in the opposing surface portion 52 of the box-shaped main body 51, and the symbol display device is provided on the rear surface side of the opposing surface portion 52. 19 is installed, and the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 attached to the installation means 52b faces the opening 52a. The shutter device 500 is disposed in front of the opening 52 a formed in the facing surface portion 52, and the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, and 167 surround the outer periphery of the shutter device 500. It is arranged. The side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 are provided on the front side of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, and 167 so as to surround the outer periphery of the shutter device 500. That is, the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167 and the side light emitting effect devices 170, 177 are configured to surround the opening 52 a of the facing surface portion 52. Here, the opening 52 a formed in the back unit 50 (opposing surface portion 52) is formed to have a substantially fan-shaped shape, and the opening shape of the opening 52 a is provided in the display device 501 provided in the shutter device 500. It is substantially aligned with the opening edge (described later).

  A relay board installation part 52c is formed at a position below the symbol display device 19 on the rear surface side of the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing surface part 52), and the relay board installed in the relay board installation part 52c. 702 (see FIG. 13), the rendering unit 201 disposed on the transparent plate 31, the shutter device 500 disposed on the back unit 50, the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167, and Wirings from the side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 are connected (see FIG. 13). The relay board 702 is connected to wiring from the control device 700 disposed on the back side of the middle frame 12, and the rendering unit 201, the shutter device 500, and the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167. In addition, each device of the side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 can be controlled based on a control signal from the corresponding control device 700.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 11, the opposed surface portion 52 is formed with a first partition wall 60 protruding forward at a position above the shutter device 500 so as to protrude forward, and the shutter. A second partition wall 61 protruding forward is formed at a position substantially aligned with the left and right ends of the device 500 so as to protrude forward. The first partition wall 60 is formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape at the upper left and upper right positions of the facing surface portion 52, and the facing surface portion 52 extends from the end close to the left and right image wall portions 53c and 53d. It extends so that it may approach the said upper wall part 53a as it goes to the center of the left-right direction. Then, in the area surrounded by the first partition wall 60 located at the upper left part of the facing surface part 52, the upper picture wall part 53a, and the left picture wall part 53c (hereinafter referred to as the first upper installation area 62), A left upper light emitting decoration device 90 constituting the light emitting decoration device is disposed, and is surrounded by a first partition wall 60 located at the upper right portion of the facing surface portion 52, an upper wall portion 53a, and a right wall portion 53d. In the area (hereinafter, referred to as the second upper installation area 63), the upper right light emitting decoration device 105 that constitutes the light emitting decoration device is disposed, and the upper edge of the opening 52a formed in the facing surface portion 52 and the left and right sides A central light emitting decoration device 167 constituting the light emitting decoration device is disposed in a region surrounded by the first partition wall 60 (hereinafter referred to as a central installation region 64). Then, the second partition wall 61 substantially aligned with the left end portion of the shutter device 500, the left image wall, the lower end portion of the shutter device 500, and the left side surfaces of the first and second partition walls 76 and 77 The left side light emitting decoration device 120 that constitutes the light emitting decoration device is disposed in a region surrounded by (referred to as the left side installation region 65 hereinafter), and a second partition wall 61 that is substantially aligned with the right end portion of the shutter device 500. A light emitting decoration device is configured in an area (hereinafter, referred to as a right side installation area 66) surrounded by the right wall, the lower end of the shutter device 500, and the right side surfaces of the first and second partition walls 76 and 77. A right side light emitting decoration device 145 is disposed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 69, FIG. 70, FIG. 71, or FIG. 72, each of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167 is configured on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50. A plurality of positioning protrusions 67 and screw holes 68 for positioning and fixing the LED substrates 91, 106, 121, 123, 125, 146, 148, 150, 168 (described later) are provided for each of the installation regions 62 to 66. Through holes 69 are formed and inserted through screws for fixing decorative covers 93, 108, 127, 152 (described later) constituting the light emitting decorative devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167. A plurality of regions 62 to 66 are formed. Note that the number of positioning protrusions 67, screw holes 68, and through-holes 69 is the same as the number of LED substrates 91, 106, 121, 123, 125, 146, 148, 150, 168 attached to the installation regions 62 to 66, and decorative covers. The size can be appropriately determined depending on the size and shape of 93, 108, 127, 152. In addition, the opposing surface portion 52 has a wiring insertion opening (front and rear opening) at a substantially central position in the left-right direction at a boundary position with the upper wall (a position overlapping the effect unit 201 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 in the front-rear direction). (Hereinafter referred to as the upper central wiring insertion opening 71), and the wiring of the effect unit 201 provided in the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is inserted into the upper central wiring insertion opening 71 and led out to the back side of the back unit 50. The Further, a plurality of wiring insertion openings (hereinafter referred to as LED wiring insertion openings 72) opened in the front-rear direction are provided at positions corresponding to the respective installation regions 62 to 66 in the facing surface portion 52, and the LED wiring insertion openings. 72, wirings connected to the LED boards 91, 106, 121, 123, 125, 146, 148, 150, 168 constituting the respective light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167 are inserted. It has come to be. A wiring port 73 through which a wiring connected to a composite display device 142 described later is opened at the front and rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction at the boundary position of the facing surface portion 52 with the left image wall portion 53c. Has been. In addition, solenoid insertion ports 74 that open in the front-rear direction are formed at positions separated from the left and right at positions below the upper central wiring insertion port 71 in the facing surface portion 52, respectively. A rear end portion of a drive solenoid 369 provided in 201 is inserted.

  A first partition wall (partition wall) 76 that surrounds the upper and left and right sides of the device main body 41 of the start winning device 38 is directed forward on the facing surface portion 52 (accommodating recess 78) of the box-shaped main body 51. The device main body 41 of the start winning device 38 is accommodated in a first accommodating portion 76a defined by the first partition wall 76. Similarly, a second partition wall (partition wall) 77 that surrounds the upper and left and right sides of the device main body 45 of the special prize-winning device 43 protrudes forward on the facing surface portion 52 of the box-shaped main body 51. The device main body 45 of the special prize-winning device 43 is accommodated in the second accommodating portion 77 a that is formed and defined by the second partition wall 77. That is, the shutter unit 500 and the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, and 167 in the back unit 50 are formed by the first and second partition walls 76 and 77 that partition the first and second accommodating portions 76a and 77a. The area in which the side light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, and 167 are disposed is partitioned from the housing portion of the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43. The lower wall 53b of the box-shaped main body 51 is configured to open forward and backward and at a position corresponding to the second accommodating portion 77a, and the second partition wall 77 is formed on the box-shaped main body 51. It also functions as a wall that defines the lower surface.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, the lower end portion of the first partition wall 76 is formed to be connected to the upper surface of the second partition wall 77, and the first storage portion 76a and the second storage portion 77a. The second partition wall 77 is formed with a communication port 77b that communicates vertically with the pachinko ball that has won a prize at the upper and lower winning ports of the start winning device 38, and wiring that connects to the start winning device 38. It is comprised so that it can guide to the 2nd accommodating part 77a side via the communicating port 77b. Further, the lower fixing portion 55 has a wiring insertion notch portion (notch portion) 55a that opens in the front-rear and top-bottom directions at a position corresponding to the ball discharge notch portion 31f formed in the lower portion of the transparent plate 31. Is formed. That is, the pachinko ball that has passed through the out port 36c and the ball discharge notch 31f formed in the transparent plate 31 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 30 through the wire insertion notch 55a. It has become. The wiring insertion notch 55a is configured to communicate with the second housing 77a, and the wiring of the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 disposed on the transparent plate 31 is connected to the second winning portion 77a. The back unit 50 (the lower fixing portion 55) can be inserted through the back side of the back unit 50 through the wiring insertion notch 55a.

(Shutter device 500 cover installation area and fixed boss)
In addition, the facing surface portion 52 is formed with a housing recess 78 that is recessed rearward between the second partition wall 77 and the opening 52 a, and the housing recess 78 has an operating means in the shutter device 500. A cover body 583 (described later) for protecting the drive transmission unit (gears 565 and 576) is accommodated. That is, the cover body 583 of the shutter device 500 is housed in the housing recess 78 so that the depth dimension before and after the shutter device 500 is reduced and the shutter device 500 can be disposed in the back unit 50. Further, a first shutter wiring is inserted into the housing recess 78 at a boundary position with the first partition wall 76 and wirings connected to drive motors 561 and 563 of the shutter device 500 and detection means 547 (described later). A second shutter wiring that is formed at two positions that are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides of the opening 79 and that is connected to a decoration LED substrate 607 (described later) provided on the shutter device 500 at a position above the housing recess 78. The insertion port 80 is formed so as to open forward and backward.

  As shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 69, FIG. 70, FIG. 71, or FIG. 72, shutter facing bosses 81 and 82 for fixing the shutter device 500 are provided in the opening 52a in the facing surface portion 52 and the housing recess 78. Are formed so as to protrude forward at a plurality of locations (12 locations in the embodiment), and screw holes 81c are formed at the front end portions of the shutter fixing bosses 81 and 82, respectively. Specifically, the shutter fixing boss 81 is formed at five locations spaced apart in the left-right direction along the opening edge of the opening 52 a at the upper portion of the opening 52 a in the facing surface portion 52. In FIG. 2, it is formed in two places that are separated from each other to the left and right. Further, the shutter fixing boss 82 is formed at two positions spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left and right lower positions of the opening 52a in the facing surface portion 52, and one is formed at a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction of the opening 52a. Has been. Note that the five shutter fixing bosses 81 formed above the opening 52a and the two shutter fixing bosses 81 formed in the accommodating recess 78 in the facing surface portion 52 have a large diameter on the facing surface portion 52 and the accommodating recess 78 side. A portion 81a and a small-diameter portion 81b on the front end portion side having a smaller diameter than the large-diameter portion 81a are formed, and a screw hole 81c is formed in the small-diameter portion 81b.

(About lighting windows)
As shown in FIGS. 5, 10, 11, 12, and 73, an upper step portion 83 that opens forward and downward is formed on the front surface of the upper fixing portion 54 in the back unit 50. An illumination window 84 is formed continuously from the upper image wall 53a to the upper fixing portion 54 (upper step portion 83). That is, at the position corresponding to the upper wall portion 53a, the illumination window 84 opens up and down and forward, and at the position corresponding to the upper fixing portion 54 (upper step portion 83), the illumination window The portion 84 opens in the front-rear direction and the downward direction, so that the opening of the upper wall portion 53a and the upper fixing portion 54 (upper step portion 83) are continuous. In the following description, the illumination window portion 84 formed on the upper wall portion 53a is referred to as a first window portion 84a, and the illumination window formed on the upper fixing portion 54 (upper step portion 83). The portion 84 may be referred to as the second window portion 84b to be distinguished. Here, the front opening width dimension of the first window portion 84a and the lower opening width dimension of the second window portion 84b are set to be the same so that the entire first window portion 84a and the second window portion 84b communicate with each other. It has become. Further, on the front side of the lighting window portion 84 (second window portion 84b), a decorative plate portion constituting the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167 (left and right upper light emitting decoration devices 90, 105). 99, 115 (described later) is positioned, and the decorative plate portions 99, 115 can be irradiated with light through the illumination window portion 84.

  As shown in FIGS. 4, 9, 10, and 11, the upper end edge of the upper stepped portion 83 is formed in an arc shape that bulges upward. An upper end edge of the upper step portion 83 is provided at a position that substantially aligns with the outer rail 35 disposed on the transparent plate 31 in the front-rear direction. It comes to face inside. The second window portion 84b (illumination window portion 84) is formed so that most of the upper step portion 83 opens. The upper edge portion of the opening of the second window portion 84b is formed in an arc shape extending along the upper end edge of the upper step portion 83, and the second window portion 84b (illumination window portion 84). The decorative plate portions 99 and 115 constituting the left and right upper light emitting decoration devices 90 and 105 are brightened by the light emitted through the upper and lower parts of the game area 32 according to the shape of the game area 32. Can be illuminated

(About shutter device)
In the back unit 50, a shutter device 500 capable of shielding and opening the display surface (display unit) 19a of the symbol display device 19 is disposed on the front side of the opening 52a. As shown in FIG. 50, the shutter device 500 includes a base frame 502 that defines a display space 501 that allows the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 to be viewed from the front side, and is movable to the base frame 502. A shutter member 503 arranged and capable of shielding the display space 501; and an operating means 504 for moving the shutter member 503 between a shielding position for shielding the display space 501 and an open position for opening the display space 501. Basically composed.

(About the base frame)
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 54, the base frame body 502 includes an upper rail member 505 and a lower rail member 506 constituting upper and lower frame portions, and a left shutter housing member 507 and a right shutter housing constituting left and right frame portions. It is basically composed of the member 508. A lower edge of the upper rail member 505 is formed in an arc shape that is concave downward, and an upper edge of the lower rail member 506 (an upper edge of a guide portion 519 described later) is an arc that protrudes upward. The opposing edges of the left and right shutter housing members 507, 508 are formed so as to be separated from each other as they go from the lower rail member 506 side to the upper rail member 505 side, and these four members 505, 506, 507 and 508 define the fan-shaped display space 501 that is convex upward.

  The display space 501 is set to a size that substantially matches the opening 50 a of the back unit 50. That is, the lower edge of the upper rail member 505 and the upper edge of the lower rail member 506 are substantially aligned with the upper and lower edges of the opening 50a of the back unit 50, and the right edge and the right shutter of the left shutter housing member 507 are accommodated. The left edge of the member 508 is substantially aligned with the left and right edges of the opening 50 a of the back unit 50. Thereby, when the display space 501 is shielded by the shutter member 503, the entire display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 facing the back side of the opening 50a of the back unit 50 is covered, and the display space is covered by the shutter member 503. When 501 is opened, the entire display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 facing the back side of the opening 50a of the back unit 50 is opened.

(About the upper rail member)
As shown in FIG. 54, the upper rail member 505 has a substantially arc shape as a whole, and is formed in a substantially left-right symmetric shape with a center line passing vertically through the center in the left-right direction. Upper mounting portions 509 and 509, which are detachably attached to the upper end portions of the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508, are suspended from the front surfaces of the left and right end portions of the upper rail member 505 at a predetermined length. Further, the front portion of the upper rail member 505 is formed in a stepped shape that is recessed backward as it goes from the lateral side to the center. Since the upper rail member 505 of the embodiment is formed substantially symmetrically, the configuration on the left side will be mainly described, and the corresponding parts and members on the right side will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the front surface of the left half of the upper rail member 505, a two-stepped portion is formed on the front side with respect to a portion where a rear upper rail groove 515 located at the rearmost portion to be described later is formed, and is located at the foremost portion. The stepped portion will be referred to as the front stepped portion 510, and the stepped portion located on the rear side will be referred to as the middle stepped portion 511. In addition, the portion located on the rear side of the middle step portion 511 is a reference portion and is not stepped. However, for convenience of explanation, it is referred to as a rear step portion 512.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the lower surface of the upper rail member 505 facing the lower rail member 506 (opposing surface) is opened downward corresponding to the stepped portions 510, 511, 512, and is circular in the left-right direction. Upper rail grooves 513, 514, and 515 extending in an arc are formed in parallel in the front and rear direction. The three upper rail grooves 513, 514, and 515 are referred to as a front upper rail groove 513, a middle upper rail groove 514, and a rear upper rail groove 515 corresponding to the stepped portions 510, 511, and 512, respectively. And the length of the left-right direction extended from the left end of the upper rail member 505 in each rail groove | channel 513,514,515 to the right (center) so that it may differ corresponding to each step part 510,511,512. It is formed. That is, the front upper rail groove 513 is the shortest and is set to be longer in the order of the middle upper rail groove 514 and the rear upper rail groove 515, and the left and right rear upper rail grooves 515 and 515 communicate with each other. In addition, upper ends of left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536, which will be described later, are slidably inserted into the three upper rail grooves 513, 514, and 515, and along the upper rail grooves 513, 514, and 515, respectively. The left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 are configured to move in the left-right direction. The left shielding plates 534 and 535 that move along the front upper rail groove 513 and the middle upper rail groove 514 are stepped portions 510 and 511 that define end portions on the center side of the upper rail grooves 513 and 514. Further movement to the central side is restricted by the wall. As described above, the left and right rear upper rail grooves 515 and 515 communicate with each other, and the opposite side edges of the left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 moving along the rear upper rail grooves 515 and 515 are formed. It is comprised so that it can contact | abut in the center of the left-right direction.

  On the upper surface of the upper rail member 505, a fixing portion 516 that protrudes upward is formed over a substantially entire length in the left-right direction at a position that is biased rearward from the front end. A plurality of fixing recesses 517 into which the projected shutter fixing boss 81 is inserted from the rear side are formed at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction. Then, with each shutter fixing boss 81 fitted in the fixing recess 517, a screw inserted from the front into a through hole provided corresponding to the fixing recess 517 is screwed into the screw hole 81 c of the shutter fixing boss 81. Thus, the upper rail member 505 (the base frame body 502 of the shutter device 500) is positioned and fixed to the back unit 50. The shutter fixing boss 81 inserted into the fixing recess 517 is formed in a two-stage shape with a small diameter portion 81b protruding from the front end of the rear large diameter portion 81a, and the small diameter portion 81b is formed in the fixing recess 517. When inserted, the front end of the large-diameter portion 81a comes into contact with the back surface of the fixed portion 516, and the upper rail member 505 is reliably positioned. In addition, a plurality of upper metal reinforcing plates 518 (FIG. 54) are arranged on the front surface of the fixing portion 516 so as to contact each other, and an earth wire (not shown) arranged on the back unit 50 is placed on the upper side. The shutter device 500 is grounded by connecting to the metal reinforcing plate 518.

(About the lower rail member)
As shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the lower rail member 506 is formed with a mounting plate portion 520 that hangs down by a predetermined length on the lower surface of a guide portion 519 formed in an upward convex shape. Lower attachment portions 521 and 521 to which the lower end portions of the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508 are detachably attached are formed at both left and right ends of the 520 so as to extend above the guide portion 519 by a predetermined length. ing. The lower rail member 506 is formed in a symmetrical shape with a center line passing through the center in the left-right direction up and down, and mainly describes the configuration on the left side, and corresponding parts and members on the right side have the same reference numerals. Detailed description will be omitted.

  On the upper surface (opposing surface) facing the upper rail member 505 of the guide portion 519, there is an upper side corresponding to each of the upper rail grooves 513, 514, and 515 before, inside and after the upper rail member 505 is formed. An open front lower rail groove 522, middle lower rail groove 523, and rear lower rail groove 524 are formed in parallel in the front-rear direction. In addition, lower end portions of left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536, which will be described later, are slidably inserted into the three lower rail grooves 522, 523, and 524, and along the lower rail grooves 522, 523, and 524, respectively. The left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 are configured to move in the left-right direction. The lengths of the three lower rail grooves 522, 523, and 524 in the left-right direction are set so as to increase in order from the front side to the rear side in correspondence with the upper rail grooves 513, 514, and 515. The left shielding plates 534 and 535 that move along the middle and lower rail grooves 523 are restricted from further movement toward the center side by the walls that define the ends on the center side of the lower rail grooves 522 and 523. It is like that. That is, the left shielding plate 534 guided by the front upper and lower rail grooves 513 and 522 and the left shielding plate 535 guided by the middle upper and lower rail grooves 514 and 523 have both upper and lower end portions of the rail grooves 513, 522, Positions are regulated by walls defining 514 and 523. The left and right rear lower rail grooves 524 and 524 communicate with each other in the same manner as the left and right rear upper rail grooves 515 and 515 formed on the upper rail member 505, and are connected to the rear lower rail grooves 524 and 524. The opposing side edges of the left and right shielding plates 536, 539 that move along are configured to be able to abut on the center in the left-right direction.

(About shutter storage members)
Since the left and right shutter storage members 507 and 508 are substantially bilaterally symmetric, the configuration of the left shutter storage member 507 located mainly on the left side will be described, and the corresponding part of the right shutter storage member 508 located on the right side The members are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the left shutter housing member 507 has a front plate 525 formed in a substantially fan shape and a predetermined rearward from a left edge (an edge separated from the display space 501) of the front plate 525. A side plate 526 extending in length, and a side mounting portion 527 formed at the outer lower portion of the side plate 526. The upper and lower ends of the front plate 525 and the side portion mounting portion 527 are provided on the upper rail member 505. The upper mounting portion 509, the fixing portion 516, and the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506 and the lower mounting portion 521 are configured to be screwed and fixed in a state of being positioned through positioning means such as a boss or a pin. is there. Then, on the rear side of the left shutter storage member 507 attached between the upper and lower rail members 505, 506, a storage space that opens to the right (display space 501 side) and rear is defined by the front plate 525 and the side plate 526, A left shutter member 532 described later is configured to be stored in the storage space at the open position of the display space 501.

  On the display space 501 side of the front plate 525 (the front surface of the left shutter housing member 507), there is a step surface 528a that is lowered one step rearward, and a side wall 528b that rises along the left edge that is separated from the display space 501 in the step surface 528a. A step portion 528 is formed. In the side wall 528b, a plurality of (two in the embodiment) insertion holes 528c penetrating in the left-right direction are formed at positions deviated toward the stepped surface 528a, and each insertion hole 528c is described later. The positioning protrusion 610 of the transparent protective plate 609 is inserted in a detachable manner. Further, a protective plate boss 529 is provided on the rear surface of the front plate 525 at a position corresponding to each insertion hole 528c (see FIGS. 64 to 66), and the positioning protrusion 610 inserted through the insertion hole 528c has the protection plate. The boss 529 is fixed with screws.

  A side wall 528b of the step portion 528 is formed so as to substantially follow the shape of the left end portion of the frame-shaped decorative body 200, and when the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is disposed on the transparent plate 31 from the front side, The rear end portion (the first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274) of the left side portion of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is accommodated in the step portion 528. It should be noted that the front surface and the step surface 528a of the front plate 525 where the step portion 528 is not formed have an opaque decoration, and when the display space 501 is shielded by the shutter member 503, the left and right shielding plates 534, It is configured so that one picture is completed including the decorations provided on the front surfaces of 535, 536, 537, 538, and 539.

  On the back surface of the front plate 525, a side metal reinforcing plate 530 is disposed over the substantially entire length in the vertical direction on the side close to the side wall 528b, and is configured to reinforce the left shutter storage member 507 ( (See FIG. 51). In addition, a buffer member 531 with which the side ends of the left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 stored in the storage space abut on the storage space side surface of the side wall 528b (surface facing the display space 501) is disposed. Has been. As the buffer member 531, an elastic member such as rubber or sponge is preferably used.

(About shutter members)
As shown in FIG. 50, the shutter member 503 that shields and opens the display space 501 can shield and open the left half of the display space 501 and the right half of the display space 501. Right shutter member 533. The left shutter member 532 is composed of three substantially fan-shaped left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 that can partially shield the display space 501. The three left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 are connected to the left and right. In this state, the left half of the display space 501 can be shielded, and three left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 overlap in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the left shutter housing member 507 (the left side of the base frame 502). The display space 501 can be opened in a state. The right shutter member 533 includes three substantially fan-shaped right shielding plates 537, 538, and 539 that can partially shield the display space 501, and the three right shielding plates 537, 538, and 539 are arranged on the left and right. The right half of the display space 501 is shielded in a continuous state, and three right shielding plates 537, 538, and 539 overlap in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right shutter housing member 508 (the right side portion of the base frame body 502). In this state, the display space 501 can be opened. Since the configurations of the left shutter member 532 and the right shutter member 533 are basically bilaterally symmetric, the configuration of the left shutter member 532 will be mainly described, and corresponding portions and members of the right shutter member 533 are denoted by the same reference numerals. Detailed description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the left shutter member 532 has a positional relationship in which three left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the front left shielding plate 534 located at the foremost portion. However, the upper left and lower rails 513 and 522 are arranged so as to be guided to move in the left-right direction with the upper and lower ends inserted therein, and the middle left shielding plate 535 located in the middle is provided with The rear left shielding plate 536, which is disposed so as to be movable in the left-right direction with the upper and lower ends inserted into the rail grooves 514, 523, is located at the rearmost portion, and the rear upper and lower rail grooves 515, 524 are arranged. With the upper and lower ends inserted in the guide, it is arranged to be guided so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Since the front, middle, and rear left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 have basically the same configuration, the basic components will be described with respect to the rear left shielding plate 536. The same portions and members of the left shielding plates 535 and 536 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  The rear left shielding plate 536 is formed in a substantially fan-shaped shape whose upper and lower end portions can be inserted into the rear upper and lower rail grooves 515 and 524, and a ball bearing 540 as a rotating body is freely rotatable at each of the four corner portions. It is arranged. The rear left shielding plate 536 with the upper and lower end portions inserted into the rear upper and lower rail grooves 515 and 524 rolls while the four ball bearings 540 are in contact with the upper and lower rail members 505 and 506 and roll. It is configured to move in the left-right direction along the rail grooves 515 and 524. An upper front closing engagement piece 541 (see FIGS. 60 and 61) is provided at the left end of the front upper portion of the rear left shielding plate 536 so as to project forward, and at the lower front portion of the rear left shielding plate 536. At the left end, a lower front closing engagement piece 542 projects toward the front side. On the other hand, with respect to the middle left shielding plate 535, the upper and lower front closing engagement pieces 541 and 542 are provided at the same position as the rear left shielding plate 536, and the rear left shielding plate 536 is disposed at the right end portion of the upper rear surface. An upper back closing engagement piece 543 that can be engaged with the upper front closing engagement piece 541 from the left side protrudes toward the rear side, and the lower end of the rear left shielding plate 536 is formed at the right end of the lower back surface. A lower back closing engagement piece 544 that can be engaged with the front closing engagement piece 542 from the left side is projected toward the rear side. Furthermore, a lower back opening engagement piece 545 to which a lower front closing engagement piece 542 of the rear left shielding plate 536 can be engaged from the right side is directed to the left end of the lower back surface of the middle left shielding plate 535 toward the rear side. Projected. As for the front left shielding plate 534, upper and lower back closing engagement pieces 543 and 544 and a lower back opening engagement piece 545 are provided at the same position as the middle left shielding plate 535. The rear closing engagement pieces 543 and 544 are configured so that the upper and lower front closing engagement pieces 541 and 545 can be engaged from the left side and the lower left side of the front left shielding plate 534. The opening engagement piece 545 is configured such that a lower front closing engagement piece 542 of the middle left shielding plate 535 can be engaged from the right side.

  Then, from the state in which the front, middle, and rear left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 are overlapped in the front-rear direction in the open position (FIGS. 52 and 66), the rear left shielding plate 536 is shielded by the left actuating means 558 described later. When moved to the right toward the position, the upper and lower front closing engagement pieces 541 and 542 in the rear left shielding plate 536 become the upper and lower back closing engagement pieces 543 and 544 in the middle left shielding plate 535. The middle left shielding plate 535 is moved together with the rear left shielding plate 536 by engaging from the left side, and the upper and lower front closing engagement pieces 541 and 542 in the middle left shielding plate 535 are moved up and down in the front left shielding plate 534. By engaging the back closing engagement pieces 543 and 544 from the left side, the front left shielding plate 534 is moved together with the middle left shielding plate 535. Further, from the state where the front, middle, and rear left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 are continuous in the left-right direction at the shielding position, the rear left shielding plate 536 is moved leftward toward the open position by the left operating means 558. In this case, the lower front closing engagement piece 542 in the rear left shielding plate 536 is engaged with the lower rear opening engagement piece 545 in the middle left shielding plate 535 from the right side, so that The left shielding plate 535 moves, and further, the lower front closing engagement piece 542 in the middle left shielding plate 535 is engaged with the lower back opening engagement piece 545 in the front left shielding plate 534 from the right side, whereby the middle left shielding. The front left shielding plate 534 is configured to move together with the plate 535. That is, the lower front closing engagement pieces 542 provided on the middle and rear left shielding plates 535 and 536 are also used as opening engagement pieces for opening the front and middle left shielding plates 534 and 535. ing.

  At the shielding position of the left shutter member 532, the upper and lower front closing engagement pieces 541 and 542 in the rear left shielding plate 536 are engaged with the left side of the upper and lower back closing engagement pieces 543 and 544 in the middle left shielding plate 535. The upper and lower front closing engagement pieces 541 and 542 in the middle left shielding plate 535 are connected to the left and right of the upper and lower rear closing engagement pieces 543 and 544 in the front left shielding plate 534 in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 65). In other words, the three left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 are connected in the left-right direction with the side end portions overlapping in the front-rear direction by a predetermined length, and the three left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 are mutually connected. There are no gaps. Further, a front left shielding plate 534 that moves toward the right (center) along the front upper and lower rail grooves 513 and 522 is formed by a wall that defines an end portion on the center side of the front upper and lower rail grooves 513 and 522. At the position where the position is restricted, the left end of the front left shielding plate 534 is set to overlap the rear side of the left shutter housing member 507 by a predetermined length, and the left shutter housing member 507 and the front left shielding plate 534 It is comprised so that a clearance gap may not arise between. When the three left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 face the open position in the state where they overlap in the front-rear direction, the right end portion of the left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 is separated from the right end edge of the left shutter housing member 507. It is set so as not to extend toward the display space 501 (see FIG. 64 or FIG. 66). That is, the entire display space 501 is configured to be opened at the open positions of the left and right shutter members 532 and 533.

  The front surfaces of the left and right shielding plates 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, and 539 are provided with necessary decorations. In a state where 539 faces the shielding position, one pattern is completed together with the decoration applied to the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508. In the embodiment, the left and right shielding plates 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, and 539 are made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and are configured to be opaque only at the decorated portions.

(About detection means)
A detection piece 546 extending leftward is provided below the left end edge of the rear left shielding plate 536, and the detection piece 546 is provided behind the middle left shielding plate 535 adjacent to the left side at the shielding position. It is configured to face (FIG. 51 is a rear view, so it is reversed left and right). The front surface of the middle left shielding plate 535 facing the front side of the detection piece 546 is provided with the decoration at the shielding position, and the detection piece 546 is hidden behind the middle left shielding plate 535 and viewed from the front side at the shielding position. It is impossible. A detection means 547 capable of detecting the detection piece 546 is disposed on the lower mounting portion 521 of the lower rail member 506. The detection means 547 detects the detection piece 546 when the rear left shielding plate 536 arrives at the open position, and based on the detection signal, the left drive motor 561 described later is controlled by the control device 700 (see FIG. 13). Configured to be controlled.

  The lower mounting portion 521 of the lower rail member 506 is provided with a sensor installation portion 548 that opens upward and rearward, and the detection means 547 is installed in the accommodated state on the sensor installation portion 548. The detection means 547 is fixed to the sensor bosses 549, 549 provided on the left and right sides via screws. In addition, a connector notch 548a is formed on the lower wall portion of the sensor installation portion 548, and the connector receiving portion 547a provided in the detecting means 547 is in a state of being fitted into the connector notch 548a. It is configured that the detection means 547 can be surely positioned with respect to the sensor installation portion 548 by extending to. It should be noted that a pair of detection units in the detection means 547 extend upward from the sensor installation unit 548, and the detection piece 546 faces between both detection units so that the arrival of the rear left shielding plate 536 at the open position is detected. It has become. As the detection means 547, an optical sensor provided with a light receiving element and a light emitting element is adopted, but various other types of sensors capable of detecting the detection piece 546 can be used.

  A wiring binding piece 550 is provided at a lower position near the sensor installation portion 548 on the back surface of the mounting plate portion 520 in the lower rail member 506, and wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 547a via a connector insertion portion ( (Not shown) is configured to be bound to the wiring binding piece 550 via a binding tool (not shown). In addition, a wiring through hole 551 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed on the center side of the mounting board portion 520 from the position where the wiring binding piece 550 is disposed, and the wiring after being bound to the wiring binding piece 550 is connected to the wiring through hole. It is pulled out to the front side of the mounting platen portion 520 through 551.

  In addition, the second left side LED board 123 of the left side light emitting decoration device 120 which will be described later extends from the front left side of the mounting plate part 520 in the lower rail member 506 to the front side of the side part mounting part 527 of the left shutter housing member 507. Is arranged. The connector receiving portion disposed on the back surface of the second left side LED board 123 is inserted into the back side via the wiring hole 551 located on the corresponding left side. The wiring connected to the unit is pulled out to the back side through the corresponding LED wiring insertion opening 72 of the back unit 50 and connected to the relay board 702. A second right side LED board 148 of a right side light emitting decoration device 145, which will be described later, is arranged from the right front side of the mounting plate part 520 of the lower rail member 506 to the front side of the side mounting part 527 of the right shutter housing member 508. The connector receiving portion disposed on the back surface of the second right side LED board 148 is configured to be inserted into the back side through the wiring hole 551 located on the corresponding right side. Note that the wiring connected to the connector receiving portion disposed on the back surface of the second right side LED board 148 is connected to the lower right LED board 150 of the right side light emitting decoration device 145.

(About magnets)
Opposite side edges (hereinafter referred to as contact edges) of the rear left shielding plate 536 and the rear right shielding plate 539 in the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are the center in the horizontal direction of the display space 501 at the shielding position. It is comprised so that it may contact | abut over the full length. On the rear side of the rear left shielding plate 536, a left contact surface 552 that is flush with the contact edge at the approximate center in the vertical direction protrudes rearward (see FIG. 57). A left permanent magnet 553 is disposed on the left side via a left fixing member 554. Further, on the back side of the rear right shielding plate 539, a right abutting surface 555 that is flush with the abutting edge at a substantially center in the up-down direction is provided to project rearwardly. A magnet (magnetic attachment member) 556 is disposed via a right fixing member 557. When the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are moved to the shielding position, the permanent magnets are brought into contact with the abutting edges and the abutting surfaces 552 and 555 of the rear left shielding plate 536 and the rear right shielding plate 539. 553 and 556 are magnetized (adsorbed) by magnetic force so that the contact state of both shielding plates 536 and 539 can be maintained (see FIG. 51). Note that the contact surfaces 552 and 555, the permanent magnets 553 and 556, and the fixing members 554 and 557 are disposed at positions where the decoration is applied on the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539. 552, 555, permanent magnets 553, 556 and fixing members 554, 557 are not visible from the front side.

(Operating means)
Actuating means 504 for operating the shutter member 503 moves the left shutter member 532 between an open position where the left shutter member 532 is housed on the rear side of the left shutter housing member 507 and a shielding position where the left half of the display space 501 is shielded. The left actuating means 558 and the right actuating means 559 for moving the right shutter member 533 between the open position for accommodating the right shutter accommodating member 508 on the rear side and the shielding position for shielding the right half of the display space 501 are configured. Is done. Since the left actuating means 558 and the right actuating means 559 are symmetric, the structure of the left actuating means 558 will be mainly described. Description is omitted.

  The left actuating means 558 has one end pivotably supported on the back side of the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506 and the other end connected to the back side of the rear left shielding plate 536 in the left shutter member 532. Thus, the left operating member 560 that reciprocates the rear left shielding plate 536 in the left-right direction along the rear upper and lower rail grooves 515 and 524 by swinging and the mounting plate 520 is disposed on the left operating member. It is basically composed of a left drive motor 561 as a left drive means for reciprocatingly swinging the member 560. The rear left shielding plate 536 located at the rearmost part of the left shutter member 532 is directly operated by the left operating member 560, and the rear left shielding plate 536 functions as an operating shielding plate. Note that members corresponding to the left operation member 560 and the left drive motor 561 in the right operation means 559 are referred to as the right operation member 562 and the right drive motor 563 separately.

(About actuating members)
The left actuating member 560 is pivotally supported at one end in the longitudinal direction by a pivot 564 projecting from the mounting platen 520 so as to extend rearward, and is attached to one end of the left actuating member 560. Is arranged so that the driven gear 565 rotates integrally. The left actuating member 560 includes a connecting arm portion 566 extending in parallel with the rear left shielding plate 536 from the other end connected to the rear left shielding plate 536 to a position facing the rear side of the mounting plate portion 520. A thin plate-like member formed from a pivot arm 567 extending to one end in a state of being displaced rearward from the linkage arm 566 and connected to the linkage arm 566, the pivot arm 567 The driven gear 565 is disposed at the end of the shaft. As shown in FIG. 6, the connecting arm portion 566 extends parallel to and close to the rear left shielding plate 536 in a state where the shutter device 500 is disposed on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50. The front-rear dimension required for the front side of the opening 52a to be disposed can be kept small. Further, the pivoting arm portion 567 is displaced rearward with respect to the connecting arm portion 566, so that the driven gear 565 described later is driven without separating the connecting arm portion 566 from the rear left shielding plate 536 to the rear side. It can arrange | position in the position which can mesh | engage with. The rearward movement of the left drive motor 561 can be suppressed by the rearward displacement of the pivot arm 567 as will be described later. A long hole 568 is formed at the other end of the left operating member 560, and a connecting member 569 disposed in the middle in the vertical direction on the back side of the rear left shielding plate 536 is slidably fitted into the long hole 568. Inserted (see FIG. 62), the rear left shielding plate 536 is moved in the left-right direction while the connecting member 569 moves along the long hole 568 as the left operating member 560 swings. The driven gear 565 can be correctly arranged only at the circumferential setting position by the pin and the rib with respect to the pivot arm 567, and the driven gear 562 and the driven member 560 are arranged on the left operating member 560. The gear 565 is not mistaken.

  More specifically, the configuration of the other end portion of the left operating member 560 is a protrusion protruding forward along the outer edge of the elongated hole 568 on the front surface of the left operating member 560 facing the rear surface of the rear left shielding plate 536. A concave groove 571 is formed on the back surface of the left actuating member 560 so as to surround the long hole 568 and open rearward. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 62, the connecting member 569 disposed on the rear left shielding plate 536 includes a substantially disc-shaped front flange 572 protruding from the rear surface of the rear left shielding plate 536, and the front. The shaft portion 573 projecting rearward from the flange 572 and the rear flange 574 disposed at the projecting end of the shaft portion 573 are configured such that the shaft portion 573 facing between the front and rear flanges 572 and 574 has the left operation. The left operating member 560 is connected to the rear left shielding plate 536 by being slidably inserted into the elongated hole 568 of the member 560. Further, in a state where the left actuating member 560 and the rear left shielding plate 536 are connected, the protrusion 570 of the left actuating member 560 comes into contact with the back surface of the front flange 572 of the connecting member 569, and the entire left actuating member 560 is rear left. It is comprised so that the shielding board 536 may not be contacted. Further, in a state where the left operating member 560 and the rear left shielding plate 536 are connected, the rear flange 574 of the connecting member 569 faces the concave groove 571 of the left operating member 560 and the left operating member 560 is removed from the connecting member 569. It is preventing. The rear flange 574 of the connecting member 569 is detachably screwed to the shaft portion 573. By removing the rear flange 574 from the shaft portion 573, the rear left shielding plate 536, the left actuating member 560, The connection of can be canceled.

  The placement position of the pivot 564 (the pivot support position of the left actuating member 560) in the mounting plate portion 520 is set to the center of the range in which the rear left shielding plate 536 moves between the open position and the shielding position. . The elongated hole 568 formed in the left operating member 560 is formed to extend linearly on a line connecting the center of the pivot 564 (swing center) and the center of the connecting member 569, and When the actuating member 560 is swung, the shaft portion 573 of the connecting member 569 is configured to smoothly slide in the long hole 568. Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the left actuating member 560 is formed in a substantially inverted letter shape in the rear view at the shielding position of the left shutter member 532, and the rear left shielding plate 536 moves between the open position and the shielding position. The gap is always hidden behind the left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 so that the left actuating member 560 is not visible from the front side. More specifically, at the shielding position of the left shutter member 532, as shown in FIG. 51, the connecting arm portion 566 is directed from the connecting portion with the rear left shielding plate 536 in the left operating member 560 toward the middle left shielding plate 535 side. It extends diagonally, bends behind the middle left shielding plate 535 and extends to a position below the guide portion 519. In the open position of the left shutter member 532, as shown in FIG. 52, the connecting arm portion 566 of the left operating member 560 does not protrude from the rear side of the rear left shielding plate 536 to the display space 501 side. The side edge is configured to extend below the guide portion 519 in a state of extending substantially parallel to the side edge on the display space side of the rear left shielding plate 536. When the left actuating member 560 swings the rear left shielding plate 536 toward the shielding position, the left operating member 560 extends substantially parallel to the side edge on the display space side of the rear left shielding plate 536 in the connecting arm portion 566. The left actuating member 560 is always hidden by the left shutter member 532 until the rear left shielding plate 536 reaches the shielding position because the portion to be moved is displaced in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rear left shielding plate 536. It is configured to swing in the state. The right actuating member 562 is symmetrical to the left actuating member 560. Like the left actuating member 560, as shown in FIG. 53, the right actuating member 562 is in the open position of the right shutter member 533. The connecting arm portion 566 does not protrude from the rear of the rear right and left shielding plate 539 to the display space 501 side, and the side edge of the connecting arm portion 566 is substantially parallel to the side edge of the rear right shielding plate 539 on the display space side. It is comprised so that it may extend to the downward direction of the guide part 519 in the extended state. That is, the left and right actuating members 560 and 562 do not face the display space 501 in the open position of both shutter members 532 and 533 and move both shutter members 532 and 533 from the open position to the shielding position as shown in FIG. In this case, it is configured so as not to hinder the symbol variation effect performed on the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 without protruding from the left and right shielding plates 536 and 539.

  The left actuating member 560 is configured to reduce the weight by substantially removing the entire back surface, but the front and rear surfaces of the portions where the ribs 579 and 582 of the front and rear guide members 577 and 578 to be described later abut are flat. It is formed so that it can slide smoothly along the ribs 579 and 582 (see FIG. 62).

(About drive motor)
The left drive motor 561 is disposed on the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506 in a rearward posture with the output shaft directed rearward via a motor support 575. A drive gear 576 is disposed on an output shaft of a left drive motor 561 extending rearward from the motor support 575, and the drive gear 576 is configured to mesh with a driven gear 565 disposed on the left operation member 560. The That is, by rotating the left drive motor 561 forward and backward, the left operating member 560 swings in the left-right direction under the meshing action of both gears 576, 565, and the left rear shielding plate 536 moves in the left-right direction accordingly. It is supposed to be.

  On the motor support 575, left and right drive motors 561 and 563 are disposed at symmetrical positions across the center in the left and right direction, and the motor support 575 on which both the drive motors 561 and 563 are disposed, The mounting plate 520 is detachably mounted from the rear side. Then, with the motor support 575 mounted on the mounting platen 520, the output shafts of the drive motors 561 and 563 protrude to the rear side of the mounting platen 520, and the main body portions of the drive motors 561 and 563 are mounted. It is set to extend by a predetermined length to the front side of the board part 520. Here, the mounting platen 520 is provided so as to hang down from a substantially center in the front-rear direction of the guide unit 519, and the output shaft projects from the mounting platen 520 to the rear side, and the main body portion projects to the front side. Thus, the front and rear projecting dimensions of the drive motors 561 and 563 with respect to the guide portion 519 are reduced.

  In addition, left and right drive motors 561 and 563 attached to the mounting plate portion 520 via the motor support 575 are portions that extend below the stage portion 271 and behind the transparent plate 31 in the start winning device 38. (Specifically, the first partition wall 76) is disposed on both the left and right sides. Note that a wiring (not shown) derived from a portion facing the front side of the mounting platen 520 in the left drive motor 561 is connected to the front side of the mounting platen 520 from the wiring through hole 551 in the corresponding left detection means 547. It is connected to a connector insertion portion (not shown) common to the drawn-out wiring. Then, the wiring led out from the left driving motor 561 and the detecting means 547 is drawn out to the back side through the first shutter wiring insertion port 79 formed in the back unit 50 and connected to the relay substrate 702.

(About guide members)
A front guide member 577 and a rear guide member 578 that support the left operating member 560 and the right operating member 562 from the front and rear are respectively disposed on the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506. Since the front guide member 577 and the rear guide member 578 that support the left and right actuating members 560 and 562 are bilaterally symmetric, the configuration of the front guide member 577 and the rear guide member 578 that support the left actuating member 560 will be mainly described. Corresponding portions and members of the front guide member 577 and the rear guide member 578 that support the right actuating member 562 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  A front guide member 577 facing the front side of the left operating member 560 is detachably disposed on the back surface of the mounting plate portion 520. As shown in FIG. 59, the back surface of the front guide member 577 (the surface facing the rear guide member 578) has a plurality of front portions extending along the arc of the guide portion 519 (the moving direction of the left operating member 560). Ribs (ribs) 579 are provided in parallel so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction (direction intersecting the moving direction of the left operating member 560). The protruding end (rear end) of the front rib 579 extends slightly rearward from the back surface of the guide portion 519 (see FIG. 62) and is configured to be able to contact the front surface of the left operating member 560. The front guide member 577 extends in the left-right direction with substantially the same length as the swing range of the left operating member 560 when the rear left shielding plate 536 is moved between the open position and the shield position. When the actuating member 560 swings, it can always be supported by the front rib 579 (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

  A rear guide member 578 facing the rear side of the left operating member 560 positioned on the rear side of the front guide member 577 is attached to and detached from the rear surface of the mounting plate portion 520 in correspondence with the position where the front guide member 577 is disposed. Arranged freely. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the rear guide member 578 is provided with attachment portions 581 extending forward at both ends of the arc-shaped portion 580 formed in a substantially circular arc shape, and both the rear guide members 578 are attached. By positioning and fixing to the mounting platen portion 520 through the portions 581 and 581, the front-rear distance between the arc-shaped portion 580 and the front guide member 577 is held constant. A plurality of rear ribs 582 extending along the moving direction of the left actuating member 560 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the arc-shaped portion 580 (the surface facing the front guide member 577) spaced apart in the vertical direction. Projected. The spacing distance in the front-rear direction between the protruding end (front end) of the rear rib 582 and the protruding end of the front rib 579 is set slightly wider than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the left actuating member 560. The left actuating member 560 can swing smoothly between 582 (see FIG. 62). The arcuate portion 580 of the rear guide member 578 extends in the left-right direction longer than the swing range of the left operating member 560 when the rear left shielding plate 536 is moved between the open position and the shield position. When the left actuating member 560 swings, the rear rib 582 can always be abutted and supported.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the left operating member 560 is configured such that the connecting arm portion 566 extending in parallel with the rear left shielding plate 536 is sandwiched from front and rear by front and rear guide members 577 and 578, The connecting arm portion 566 is prevented from contacting the back surface of the guide portion 519 in the lower rail member 506. The ribs 579 and 582 of the front and rear guide members 577 and 578 are positioned so as to contact the front and rear flat surfaces of the connecting arm portion 566, and contact resistance with the ribs 579 and 582 when the left operating member 560 swings. Is to be suppressed as much as possible. Further, the front rib 579 and the rear rib 582 are set so as to be able to contact the left operating member 560 at positions shifted in the vertical direction.

(About the cover)
As shown in FIG. 52, a cover body 583 that covers the drive transmission portion composed of the left and right drive gears 576 and 576 and the left and right driven gears 565 and 565 is attached to and detached from the back surface of the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506. Arranged freely. The cover body 583 is provided with shaft through holes 584 through which end portions protruding rearward from the driven gear 565 in the respective pivots 564 are inserted at positions corresponding to the left and right pivots 564 and 564 (FIG. 62). That is, the axial movement of the left and right operating members 560 and 562 is restricted by attaching the cover body 583 to the mounting plate portion 520 in a state where the end portions of the pivots 564 corresponding to the shaft through holes 584 are inserted. Configured to do. The cover body 583 is formed with punch holes 585 penetrating in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends, and a shutter fixing boss 81 projecting from the back unit 50 is inserted into the punch hole 585 so that the shutter The fixed boss 81 is fixed to the mounting plate portion 520 with screws. Note that the lower center portion of the cover body 583 in the left-right direction is recessed upward so as not to interfere with the first partition wall 76 surrounding the start winning device 38.

(Upper arc-shaped decorative body)
The upper rail member 505 includes an upper arc-shaped decorative body 586 on the front side. As shown in FIG. 67 or 68, the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586 is formed in an arc shape having a smaller curvature than the curvature of the upper rail member 505, and is formed in a U-shape opening rearward in the longitudinal section. When the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front side, the lower wall of the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586 is configured so that the lower surface of the upper rail member 505 cannot be seen directly. The lower wall 586a of the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586 is formed in a step shape that matches the step shape of the front portion of the upper rail member 505.

  At the center in the left-right direction of the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586, at a position corresponding to the rear step portions 512, 512 of the upper rail member 505, that is, a portion recessed most rearward between the left and right middle step portions 511, 511. A notch 587 is formed which is recessed rearward and opens upward and downward and forward. A part of the upper light-emitting effect device 302 that hangs down from the upper inner edge that defines the window 200a in the frame-shaped decorative body 200 faces the cutout portion 587 of the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586, and the upper arc-shaped decorative body. The lower part of the upper light emission effect device 302 protruding downward from the body 586 is configured to extend into the display space 501 (see FIG. 49). That is, when the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are moved to the shielding position, the lower part of the upper light emitting effect device 302 overlaps the front side of the left and right rear shielding plates 536 and 539 located at the rearmost part. (See FIG. 61).

(About the lower arc decoration)
The lower rail member 506 is provided with a lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 that covers the guide portion 519 from the front side. As shown in FIG. 67 or 68, the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is formed in an arc shape having the same curvature as that of the guide portion 519 in the lower rail member 506, and is formed in a U-shape that opens rearward in the longitudinal section. Has been. Further, the upper wall 589 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 has the front, middle, and rear shielding plates 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, 539 and the left and right shutter members 532, 533 positioned at the shielding position. It is formed in a staircase shape corresponding to the staircase shape formed on the front side of the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508. That is, when the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are positioned at the shielding position, the upper surface of the guide portion 519 of the lower rail member 506 is substantially covered with the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 so that it cannot be seen directly, thereby reducing the appearance. It can be prevented.

  On the lower wall 590 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588, fixing legs 591 extending downward are formed in the vicinity of both ends in the left-right direction, and each fixing leg 591 has a pin hole 591a and a through hole. 591b is formed. On the other hand, the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506 is formed with a fitting recess 592 in which the fixed leg 591 is detachably fitted from the front side at the front surface position corresponding to each fixed leg 591. . Each fitting recess 592 is formed with a pin 592a and a screw hole 592b corresponding to the pin hole 591a and the through hole 591b of the fixed leg 591 (see FIG. 50). That is, the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is positioned on the lower rail member 506 by fitting each fixed leg 591 into the corresponding fitting recess 592 and inserting the pin 592a through the pin hole 591a. Then, a screw inserted through the through hole 591b of each fixed leg 591 from the front side is screwed into the screw hole 592b, whereby the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is fixed to the correct position with respect to the lower rail member 506. .

  A first positioning recess 593 that opens forward is formed at the front of the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506 at the center in the left-right direction so as to extend in the up-down direction. A receiving portion 594 that is recessed further rearward than the first positioning recess 593 is provided in the upper portion of the first positioning recess 593. The lower wall 590 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is provided with a first restricted portion 595 accommodated in the accommodating portion 594 at the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 63). The first regulated portion 595 is formed with an engaging piece 595a extending forward. The lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 has a plurality of lower walls 590 which are in contact with the front surface of the mounting plate portion 520 when the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is positioned on the lower rail member 506 via the fixed legs 591 and 591. A second restricted portion 596 is formed extending downward. A fixing recess 594a is formed on the back side of the mounting plate portion 520 at a position corresponding to the housing portion 594, and the shutter fixing boss 82 provided in the back unit 50 is fitted into the fixing recess 594a with screws. The mounting platen 520 is configured such that the portion where the first positioning recess 593 is formed is positioned and fixed to the back unit 50 with certainty.

(About decorative material)
In the lower rail member 506, a decorative member 597 serving as a positioning member for decorating the stage portion 271 from behind is disposed at the center of the front surface of the mounting plate portion 520. 67 and 68, the decorative member 597 is formed in a box shape that opens rearward from a front decorative plate 598 and side walls 599, 600 extending rearward from the edge of the front decorative plate 598. The The front decoration plate 598 is formed in an arc shape whose upper end edge matches the arc of the lower end edge in the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588, and its lower end edge is formed in a reverse arc shape, and has a substantially leaf shape as a whole. ing. A required decoration is applied to the front surface of the front decorative plate 598, and the decoration is visible through the stage portion 271. The decoration member 597 is entirely formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration applied to the front decoration plate 598 is transparent to light.

  Fixing plate portions 601 extending downward are respectively formed on the left and right sides of the lower side wall 600 of the decorative member 597, and each fixing plate portion 601 has a small-diameter pin hole 601a and a large-diameter through hole 601b. Is formed. On the other hand, on the front surface of the mounting plate portion 520 in the lower rail member 506, the decorative plate corresponding to the pin hole 601a and the through hole 601b of the fixed plate portion 601 at the position corresponding to each fixed plate portion 601. A pin 602 and a decorative boss 603 are formed. A fitting projection 604 that can be fitted from the front side to the first positioning recess 593 of the mounting plate portion 520 is formed at the center in the left-right direction of the front decorative plate 598 so as to extend in the vertical direction. That is, the fitting protrusion 604 is fitted into the first positioning recess 593 and the decoration pins 602 and the decoration bosses 603 corresponding to the pin holes 601a and the through holes 601b are inserted into the mounting plate portion 520. Thus, the decorative member 597 is positioned.

  A regulating piece 604a protruding rearward is formed at the upper end of the fitting protrusion 604 of the decorative member 597, and when the fitting protrusion 604 is fitted into the first positioning recess 593, it is shown in FIG. As described above, the restricting piece 604a is detachably engaged with the upper side of the engaging piece 595a in the first restricted portion 595 so that the downward movement of the decorative member 597 is restricted. In addition, in a state where the decorative member 597 is installed on the mounting plate portion 520, the upward movement of the decorative member 597 is also restricted by the upper wall 599 coming into contact with the lower wall 590 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 almost entirely. It has come to be. In addition, a plurality of positioning notches 599a are formed at the rear end edge of the upper wall 599 of the decorative member 597 so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction, and the fitting protrusion 604 is fitted into the first positioning recess 593. At this time, the second restricted portions 596 corresponding to the respective positioning notches 599a are detachably engaged, and the movement of the decorative member 597 in the left-right direction is restricted. That is, the decorative member 597 has a fitting projection 604, a first positioning recess 593, a pin hole 601a and a through hole 601b, a decorative pin 602, a decorative boss 603, a regulating piece 604a and a lower arc shape with respect to the mounting plate portion 520. The first regulated portion 595 of the decorative body 588, the positioning notch 599a and the second regulated portion 596 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 are fitted and engaged with each other, so that the positioning is accurately and reliably performed. ing. When the second left LED board 123 of the left side light emitting decoration device 120 and the second right side LED board 148 of the right side light emitting decoration device 145, which will be described later, are arranged on the front side of the mounting board 520, both the LED boards The decorative member 597 is mounted on both LEDs by screwing screws inserted into through holes provided in positions 123 and 148 at positions overlapping the front sides of the fixed plate portions 601 and 601 into the corresponding screw holes of the decorative bosses 603 and 603. It is configured to be fixed to the mounting plate portion 520 together with the substrates 123 and 148.

  The front decorative plate 598 of the decorative member 597 is formed with a second positioning recess 605 that opens to the front side at a position corresponding to the fitting protrusion 604 and extends in the vertical direction. Positioning insertion holes (positioning holes) 606 penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on both the left and right sides of the recess 605. When the transparent plate 31 on which the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is disposed is disposed on the back unit 50, a passage forming portion (rear sphere) that defines a vertical passage 289 provided on the stage portion 271 is provided. (Path portion) 288 (FIG. 25) is fitted to the second positioning recess 605 from the front side, and positioning bosses 273 provided on the stage portion 271 so as to extend rearward on both the left and right sides sandwiching the passage forming portion 288, 273 is fitted and inserted into the positioning insertion holes 606 and 606 from the front side, so that the stage portion 271 and the decorative member 597 are positioned relative to each other.

  On the front surface corresponding to the position where the decorative member 597 is disposed on the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506, the decorative LED is accommodated in the decorative member 597 on both the left and right sides of the first positioning recess 593. Substrates 607 are respectively provided. Each LED board 607 for decoration has a plurality of LEDs 607a disposed on the front surface, and is configured to illuminate the front decoration board 598 of the decoration member 597 from the back side by emitting light from the LEDs 607a. The mounting plate portion 520 is formed with a connector insertion port 608 through which a connector receiving portion provided on the back side of each decorative LED board 607 is inserted (see FIG. 49), and a connector is inserted into the connector receiving portion. The wiring connected through the section is drawn out to the back side through the second shutter wiring insertion port 80 formed in the back unit 50 and connected to the relay substrate 702.

(About transparent protective plate)
The through-hole 31a of the transparent plate 31 and the display space 501 of the shutter device 500 are partitioned forward and backward between the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508 in the shutter device 500 so that the pachinko ball enters the shutter device 500 side. A transparent protective plate 609 is provided for prevention. The transparent protective plate 609 is formed in a shape that can cover the entire display space 501, and the left and right end portions are formed in the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508. It is comprised so that it may contact | abut to the front surface of the level | step-difference part surface 528a of 528, 528a (refer FIG. 64). In addition, positioning protrusions 610 that are removably inserted into the insertion holes 528c at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 528c formed in the side walls 528b of the step portions 528 are provided at both left and right ends of the transparent protective plate 609. Are formed respectively. The transparent protective plate 609 is positioned between the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508 by inserting each positioning protrusion 610 into the corresponding insertion hole 528c.

  Each positioning protrusion 610 is formed with a through hole 610a at a position facing the back side of the front plate of the shutter housing members 507 and 508 through the insertion hole 528c, and the screw inserted through the through hole 610a The transparent protective plate 609 is fixed to the shutter housing members 507 and 508 by being screwed into the screw holes of the protective plate boss 529.

  The dimension of the side wall 528b rising from the step surface 528a of each step portion 528 formed on the shutter housing members 507 and 508 to the front side is the thickness in the front-rear direction of the transparent protective plate 609 as shown in FIGS. When the transparent protective plate 609 is disposed in contact with the stepped surface 528a, the transparent protective plate 609 is disposed on the front surface of the front plate 525 (the frontmost side of the shutter storage members 507 and 508). It is configured so as not to protrude forward from the surface located at (5). In addition, notch recesses 611 having shapes corresponding to the first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274 housed in the step portion 528 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 are formed at both left and right ends of the transparent protective plate 609. 49 (see FIG. 49), the first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274 can face the rear side without interfering with the transparent protective plate 609.

  A concave portion 612 is formed in the center of the upper end portion of the transparent protective plate 609 in the left-right direction and has a size corresponding to that of the cutout portion 587 of the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586. The concave portion 612 extends downward from the cutout portion 587. The lower part of the upper light emitting effect device 302 to be projected is configured to face the front side of the recess 612 (see FIG. 52 or 61). The concave portion 612 is formed in a shape that substantially follows the outer shape of the upper light emission effect device 302 so that the entire lower back side of the upper light emission effect device 302 is not blocked by the transparent protective plate 609.

(About luminous decoration device)
The light emitting decoration device includes a left upper light emitting decoration device 90 disposed in the first upper installation area 62 provided in the upper left portion of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) and a back unit 50 (box-shaped main body). 51) The upper right light emitting decoration device 105 disposed in the second upper installation region 63 provided in the upper right part of the above 51) and the left side installation provided in the left part of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). A left side light emitting decoration device 120 disposed in the region 65, a right side light emitting decoration device 145 disposed in the right side installation region 66 provided in the right side portion of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), A central light emitting decoration device 167 which is disposed in the central installation region 64 provided between the light emitting decoration devices 90 and 105 at the upper left and right and the shutter device 500 and illuminates the effect unit 201 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 from behind; Consists of These are configured to surround the outer periphery of the shutter device 500 by the light emitting decorative unit 90,105,120,145,167 (opening 52a of the opposing surface 52). That is, each of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, and 167 is disposed in the entire rear unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) except for the installation portion of the shutter device 500, and each light emitting decoration device is provided. By making 90, 105, 120, 145 and 167 emit light, the entire board surface (game area 32) of the transparent plate 31 can be illuminated.

  Further, between the left picture wall portion 53c of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) and the left upper light emitting decoration device 90 and the left light emitting decoration device 120, the front surface opening 52 and the facing surface portion 52 are provided. A first substrate housing space 86 from which the left support boss 86a protrudes is defined so that the left side lighting means 172 (described later) of the side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 can be housed. Furthermore, between the right wall part 53d of the said back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), the said upper right part light emission decoration device 105, and the right side light emission decoration device 145, while opening ahead, of the said opposing surface part 52 A second substrate housing space 87 from which the first right support boss 87a protrudes is defined so that the right illumination means 179 (described later) of the side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 can be housed. The light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, and 167 are electrically connected to the control device 700 installed on the back side of the middle frame 12, and are controlled by the control device 700. The light emission is controlled based on the signal (see FIG. 13).

(About the upper left light emitting decoration device)
As shown in FIGS. 9, 10, and 69, the upper left light emitting decoration device 90 is disposed in a first upper installation region 62 provided in the upper left portion of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). A left upper LED substrate 91 (first light emitter substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 89 for irradiating light are mounted, and a light transmissive upper left decoration covering the front side of the left upper LED substrate 91 The upper left decorative cover 93 is brightened by emitting light from the LED 89 of the upper left LED substrate 91. Here, the upper left LED board 91 penetrates back and forth at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 67 formed on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 corresponding to the first upper installation region 62. A plurality of positioning holes 91a are formed, and a plurality of through holes 91b penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the respective screw holes 68 formed in the facing surface portion 52 corresponding to the first upper installation region 62. Is formed. In addition, the upper left edge and the left edge of the upper left LED board 91 are located at positions corresponding to the through holes 69 for mounting the upper left decorative cover 93 formed in the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50. A fitting notch (fitting hole) 91c having a diameter larger than that of the through hole 69 is formed. As the LED 89, either a single color or a full color type can be used, but a full color type is preferable in that the emission color is changed according to the production.

  That is, the upper left LED board 91 is inserted into the positioning hole 91a of the upper left LED board 91 by inserting each positioning protrusion 67 provided in the first upper installation area 62 of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). The upper left LED is positioned in the upper installation area 62, and in this state, the screw inserted into the through hole 91b of the upper left LED board 91 is screwed into the corresponding screw hole 68 provided in the first upper installation area 62. The substrate 91 is fixed to the first upper installation area 62. At this time, each through hole 69 for mounting the upper left decorative cover 93 faces each fitting notch 91c formed in the upper left LED substrate 91, and the above described via the fitting notch 91c. The facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 is exposed to the front side.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12 or 75, the left upper LED substrate 91 has connector receiving portions 92 attached to the lower left portion and the upper right portion of the rear surface, respectively, and the opposing surface portion 52 of the rear unit 50 has The LED wiring insertion holes 72 are respectively opened corresponding to the connector receiving portions 92, and the connector receiving portions 92 are exposed to the back side of the back unit 50 (opposing surface portion 52) through the corresponding LED wiring insertion holes 72. It is supposed to do. And the wiring connected to the effect unit 201 inserted through the upper central wiring insertion opening 71 opened at the upper center of the facing surface portion 52 is a connector receiving portion located at the upper right portion of the back surface of the upper left LED board 91 The wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 92 located on the lower left side of the back surface of the upper left LED board 91 is connected to the relay board 702 provided on the back unit 50 (see FIG. 13).

  As shown in FIG. 75, the upper left decorative cover 93 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing surface portion 52) of the rear unit 50 so as to cover the front side of the upper left LED substrate 91, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin material. And a cover main body (hereinafter referred to as a left upper cover main body 98) attached to the front side of the left upper mounting base 94. That is, the light from the LED 89 of the upper left LED board 91 passes through the upper left mounting base 94 and is irradiated on the upper left cover body 98.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the upper left mounting base 94 includes a front plate portion 95 formed to have a size capable of covering the front side of the upper left LED substrate 91 (first upper installation region 62), and the front plate. It is formed in a box shape that opens rearward from a rear support plate 97 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the portion 95. On the front plate portion 95 of the upper left mounting base 94, through holes 69 for mounting the upper left decorative cover 93 formed in the facing surface portion 52 of the rear unit 50 (the notch for fitting the upper left LED board 91). The rear mounting boss (mounting boss) 96 is formed so as to protrude rearward at a position corresponding to the portion 91 c), and a screw hole 96 a is formed at the rear end of each rear mounting boss 96.

  When the left upper decorative cover 93 (left upper mounting base 94) is disposed in the box-shaped main body 51 (first upper installation region 62) of the rear unit 50, the rear end portion of the rear mounting boss 96 is provided. Is fitted into the fitting notch portion 91c and abuts against the facing surface portion 52, and the front plate portion 95 of the upper left mounting base 94 is positioned at a position spaced apart in front of the upper left LED substrate 91. It is like that. Here, in a state where the upper left mounting base 94 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 (first upper installation region 62) of the back unit 50, the first upper wall 53a opened on the upper wall 53a of the box-shaped main body 51 is provided. The front upper plate 95 is configured such that the front plate portion 95 is located at a position substantially coincident with the rear edge of the opening of one window portion 84a (illumination window portion 84), and the upper left LED transmitted through the upper left mounting base 94. Light from the LED 89 of the substrate 91 can be irradiated to the upper front of the upper image wall 53a (box-shaped main body 51) through the first window 84a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, a plurality of elastically deformable engagement hooks 97a are formed in the vicinity of the rear end of the rear support plate 97. The engagement hook 97a is formed with an engagement hole 85 (see FIG. 5) formed corresponding to the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50 when the rear mounting boss 96 is fitted into the fitting notch 91c. 5 (only some of the engagement holes 85 are shown in FIG. 5) can be detachably engaged, and the rear mounting boss 96 is fitted into the fitting notch 91c and the engagement hook 97a is engaged. By engaging with the joint hole 85, the left upper decorative cover 93 (left upper mounting base 94) is positioned with respect to the box-shaped main body 51 (first upper installation region 62) of the back unit 50. Yes. Then, screws inserted into the through holes 69 for mounting the upper left decorative cover 93 formed in the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 are screwed into the screw holes 96a of the rear mounting boss 96. The left upper decorative cover 93 (left upper mounting base 94) is fixed to the back unit 50.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the upper left cover body 98 faces the front plate 95 of the upper left mounting base 94 and can cover the front side of the upper left LED board 91 (first upper installation area 62). The decorative plate portion 99 is formed in a box shape that opens rearward from the decorative plate portion 99 that is formed in a size and the front support plate portion 100 that extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the decorative plate portion 99. That is, the light of the LED 89 provided on the upper left LED board 91 is transmitted through the upper left mounting base 94 and is applied to the decorative plate 99 of the upper left cover body 98. Here, the decorative plate portion 99 of the left upper cover main body 98 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially constant thickness by a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and has a minute uneven pattern on the front and back surfaces and a front surface ( The required design is drawn on the decorative surface), and when the light of the LED 89 of the upper left LED substrate 91 is irradiated, the entire front surface of the decorative plate portion 99 is brightened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, a front mounting boss 101 having a screw hole 101a formed in the rear end portion is formed on the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left cover body 98 so as to protrude rearward. In addition, a positioning protrusion 102 that protrudes rearward from the front support plate 100 is formed. The front plate portion 95 of the upper left mounting base 94 has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the positioning projections 102 formed on the decorative plate portion 99 and the screw holes 101a of the front-side mounting boss 101. 95b is formed, and the positioning projections 102 projecting rearward from the decorative plate portion 99 are inserted into the corresponding positioning holes 95a of the upper left mounting base 94, and the through holes 95b of the upper left mounting base 94 are formed. The upper left mounting base 94 and the upper left cover body 98 are fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole 101a of the upper left cover body 98 (front mounting boss 101). At this time, the rear end portions of the front support plate portion 100 and the front mounting boss 101 abut against the front plate portion 95 of the upper left mounting base 94 and are separated from the front of the upper left mounting base 94 to separate the decorative plate portion. 99 is located.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 75, the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left decorative cover 93 is on the front side of the upper stepped portion 83 formed in the upper fixing portion 54 of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). A part of the second window part 84b (illumination window part 84) formed on the upper fixing part 54 is covered with the decorative plate part 99 of the upper left decorative cover 93. Yes. The front support plate 100 is formed with an illumination notch 100a that opens up and down at a position corresponding to the illumination window 84 formed in the upper wall 53a. That is, by forming the notch portion 100a for illumination in the front support plate portion 100, the front plate portion 95 of the upper left mounting base 94 faces the second window portion 84b of the upper fixing portion 54, and the front plate The light from the light emitter of the upper left LED substrate 91 that has passed through the portion 95 passes through the illumination window portion 84 formed continuously from the upper wall portion 53a and the upper fixing portion 54 to the upper step portion 83. Irradiation can be applied to the decorative plate portion 99 positioned (see FIGS. 73 and 74).

(About the upper right light emitting decoration device)
The upper right light emitting decoration device 105 is disposed in a second upper installation region 63 provided in the upper right part of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), as shown in FIGS. A right upper LED substrate (first light emitter substrate) 106 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 89 that irradiate light forward are mounted, and a light transmissive upper right decoration that covers the front side of the upper right LED substrate 106 The upper right decorative cover 108 is brightened by emitting light from the LED 89 of the upper right LED substrate 106. Here, the upper right LED board 106 penetrates back and forth at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 67 formed on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 corresponding to the second upper installation region 63. A plurality of positioning holes 106a are formed, and a plurality of through holes 106b penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes 68 formed in the facing surface portion 52 corresponding to the second upper installation region 63. Has been. Further, a through hole 69 for attaching the upper right decorative cover 108 formed on the right side close to the upper wall 53a of the opposing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 is formed at the upper edge of the upper right LED substrate 106. Fitting notch portions (fitting hole portions) 106c each having a diameter larger than that of the through hole 69 are formed at positions corresponding to.

  That is, the upper right LED board 106 is inserted into the positioning hole 106a of the upper right LED board 106 by inserting each positioning protrusion 67 provided in the second upper installation region 63 of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). 2 is positioned in the upper installation area 63, and in this state, the screw inserted into the through hole 106b of the upper right LED board 106 is screwed into the corresponding screw hole 68 provided in the second upper installation area 63, whereby the upper right LED The substrate 106 is fixed to the second upper installation area 63. At this time, each through hole 69 for mounting the upper right decorative cover 108 faces the fitting notch 106c formed in the upper right LED board 106, and the back surface via the fitting notch 106c. The facing surface portion 52 of the unit 50 is exposed to the front side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 76, connector receiving portions 107 are attached to the upper right LED substrate 106 at positions spaced apart from each other on the upper surface of the back surface. And in the opposing surface part 52 of the said back unit 50, the said LED wiring penetration opening 72 is opened so that it may open back and forth corresponding to the connector receiving part 107 located in the upper right part of the said upper right part LED board 106, The wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 107 is led out to the back side of the back unit 50 through the corresponding LED wiring insertion port 72 and connected to the relay board 702 (see FIG. 13). Further, the wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 107 located at the upper left portion of the upper right LED board 106 is transmitted through the central light emission via the wiring insertion recess 52d provided in the back unit 50 (opposing surface portion 52). It is connected to the central LED board 168 of the decoration device 167 (see FIG. 13). The counter unit 52 of the back unit 50 is provided with a confirmation window 75 opened in the front and rear corresponding to the connector receiving portion 107 located in the upper left portion of the upper right LED board 106. The connection state of the wiring to the unit 107 can be confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the upper right decorative cover 108 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing surface portion 52) of the back unit 50 so as to cover the front side of the upper right LED board 106, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin material. And a cover main body (hereinafter referred to as an upper right cover main body 114) attached to the front side of the upper right mounting base 109. That is, the light from the LED 89 of the upper right LED board 106 passes through the upper right mount 109 and is irradiated on the upper right cover body 114.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the upper right mounting base 109 includes a front plate 110 formed in a size capable of covering the front side of the upper right LED board 106 (second upper installation region 63), and the front plate. It is formed in a box shape that opens rearward from a rear support plate portion 112 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the portion 110. The front plate portion 110 of the upper right mounting base 109 has through holes 69 for mounting the upper right decorative cover 108 formed on the opposing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 (fitting notches for the upper right LED board 106). The rear mounting boss (mounting boss) 111 is formed so as to protrude rearward at a position corresponding to the portion 106 c), and a screw hole 111 a is formed at the rear end of the rear mounting boss 111.

  When the upper right decorative cover 108 (upper right mounting base 109) is disposed in the box-shaped main body 51 (second upper installation region 63) of the rear unit 50, the rear end portion of the rear mounting boss 111 is provided. Is fitted into the fitting notch 106c and abuts against the facing surface 52, so that the position of the front plate 110 of the upper right mounting base 109 is regulated at a position away from the front of the upper right LED board 106. ing. Here, in a state where the upper right mounting base 109 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 (second upper installation region 63) of the rear unit 50, the first upper wall 53a opened on the upper wall 53a of the box-shaped main body 51 is provided. The front plate 110 is configured to be positioned substantially coincident with the rear edge of the opening of one window 84a (illuminating window 84) (see FIGS. 73 and 74), and the upper right mounting base. The light from the LED 89 of the upper right LED board 106 that has passed through 109 can be irradiated to the upper front of the upper wall 53a (box-shaped main body 51) through the first window 84a. Further, the right upper mounting base 109 is formed with a second right support boss 113 having a screw hole 113a formed at the front end thereof protruding forward at the front right end portion of the decorative plate portion 115, The second right illumination means 179 of the side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 is fixed to the second right support boss 113.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 76, a plurality of elastically deformable engagement hooks 112a are formed in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the rear support plate portion 112. This engagement hook 112a is formed with an engagement hole 85 (see FIG. 5) formed corresponding to the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50 when the rear mounting boss 111 is fitted into the fitting notch 106c. 5 (only some of the engagement holes 85 are shown in FIG. 5) can be engaged and disengaged. The rear mounting boss 111 is engaged with the engagement notch 106c and the engagement hook 112a is engaged. By engaging with the joint hole 85, the upper right decorative cover 108 (upper right mounting base 109) is positioned with respect to the box-shaped main body 51 (second upper installation region 63) of the rear unit 50. Yes. Then, screws inserted into the through holes 69 for mounting the upper right decorative cover 108 formed in the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 are screwed into the screw holes 111a of the rear mounting boss 111. The upper right decorative cover 108 (upper right mounting base 109) is fixed to the second upper installation area 63.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the upper right cover main body 114 faces the front plate 110 of the upper right mounting base 109 and can cover the front side of the upper right LED board 106 (second upper installation region 63). The decorative plate portion 115 having a size and a front support plate portion 116 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the decorative plate portion 115 are formed in a box shape that opens rearward. That is, the light of the LED 89 provided on the upper right LED substrate 106 passes through the upper right mount 109 and is applied to the decorative plate 115 of the upper right cover body 114. Here, the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right cover body 114 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially constant thickness by a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and has a minute uneven pattern on the front and back surfaces and a front surface ( A required pattern is drawn on the decorative surface), and when the light of the LED 89 of the upper right LED board 106 is irradiated, the entire front surface of the decorative plate 115 is brightened. In addition, the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right cover body 114 is configured to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the decorative plate portion 99 of the left upper cover body 98.

  As shown in FIG. 76, a front mounting boss 117 having a screw hole 117a formed in the rear end portion is formed on the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right cover body 114 so as to protrude rearward. A positioning protrusion 118 is formed to protrude rearward from the front support plate 116. The front plate 110 of the upper right mounting base 109 has a through hole 100b and a positioning hole penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the front mounting boss 117 and the positioning protrusion 118 formed on the decorative plate 115. 110a is formed, and a screw inserted through the through hole 110b of the upper right mounting base 109 in a state where the positioning protrusion 115a of the decorative plate 115 is inserted into the corresponding positioning hole 110a of the upper right mounting base 109. Is screwed into the screw hole 117a of the upper right cover body 114 (front mounting boss 117), whereby the upper right mount base 109 and the upper right cover body 114 are fixed. At this time, the rear end portions of the front support plate 116 and the front mounting boss 117 are in contact with the front plate 110 of the upper right mounting base 109, and are separated from the front of the upper right mounting base 109 to separate the decorative plate section. 115 is located.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 76, the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right decorative cover 108 is located on the front side of the upper step portion 83 formed in the upper fixing portion 54 of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). A part of the second window part 84b (illumination window part 84) formed on the upper fixing part 54 is covered with the decorative plate part 115 of the upper right decorative cover 108. Yes. That is, the illumination window 84 established in the upper fixing portion 54 is covered with the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left decorative cover 93 and the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right decorative cover 108. Here, the left end portion of the decorative plate portion 115 in the upper right decorative cover 108 is formed in an inclined shape that inclines downward toward the left, and is formed on the lower end portion of the decorative plate portion 99 of the left upper decorative cover 93. The second window 84b (lighting window 84) established in the upper fixing portion 54 is in contact with the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left decorative cover 93 and the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right decorative cover 108. It can be covered without any problems.

  Also, the front support plate 116 of the upper right decorative cover 108 has illumination that opens up and down at a position corresponding to the second window 84b (illumination window 84) formed in the upper wall 53a. A notch 116a for use is formed. That is, similarly to the upper left decorative cover 93, the front plate 110 of the upper right mounting base 109 is formed by forming the illumination notch 116a on the front support plate 116 of the upper right decorative cover 108. Facing the second window portion 84b of the fixing portion 54, the light of the light emitter of the upper right LED board 106 that has passed through the front plate portion 110 is continuously formed on the upper wall portion 53a and the upper fixing portion 54. The decorative plate portion 115 positioned at the upper stepped portion 83 can be irradiated through the illuminated window portion 84. In addition, a concave portion 119 that opens in the front and rear and right sides is formed at the right end portion of the upper right portion cover main body 114, and a second portion formed on the upper right portion mounting base 109 at a lower position of the concave portion 119. The right support boss 113 protrudes. The upper shielding member 181 holding the second right panel LED board 184 constituting the second right illumination means 179 of the side light emitting effect device 177 is fixed to the second right support boss 113, and the second right A panel LED substrate 184 is accommodated in the recessed portion 119. The wall portion defining the concave portion 119 in the upper right cover body 114 is inclined so as to incline to the left as it goes downward. The inclined wall portion is referred to as an inclined wall portion 114a.

(Left side lighting decoration device)
As shown in FIGS. 9, 10, and 71, the left side light emitting decoration device 120 is disposed in a left side installation region 65 provided on the left side of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), A first left LED substrate (first light emitter substrate) 121 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 89 for irradiating light are mounted, and a front left lower portion of the base frame body 502 in the shutter device 500. The second left LED substrate (second light emitter substrate) 123 and the rear unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) are disposed at the lower left portion of the second left-side LED substrate (second light emitter substrate) 123. A first lower left LED board (first light emitter board) 125 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 89 for irradiating light are mounted, the first and second left side LED boards 121 and 123, and a lower left LED. Light-transmitting left side decorative cover covering the front side of the substrate 125 ( Consists decoration cover) 127 Prefecture, by emitting the LED89 of each LED substrate 121, 123, 125, left side decorative cover 127 is adapted to be AkiraTeru. Since the configuration of the second left side LED substrate 123 has been described in accordance with the description of the shutter device 500, a description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the first left-side LED board 121 has front and back at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 67 formed on the opposing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 corresponding to the left-side portion installation region 65. A plurality of positioning holes 121a penetrating therethrough are formed, and a plurality of through holes 121b penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes 68 formed in the facing surface portion 52 corresponding to the left side portion installation region 65. Has been. In addition, at a plurality of positions spaced apart from each other on the first left side LED board 121, positions corresponding to the through holes 69 for mounting the left side decorative cover 127 formed on the facing surface part 52 of the back unit 50. Further, fitting hole portions 121c each having a larger diameter than the through hole 69 are formed. Similarly, the lower left LED board 125 is formed with a plurality of positioning holes 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 67 formed on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50. A plurality of through holes 125b penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes 68 formed in the facing surface portion 52. Further, the lower left LED board 125 has a diameter larger than that of the through hole 69 at a position corresponding to each through hole 69 for mounting the left side decorative cover 127 formed on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50. The fitting hole part 125c set to is formed.

  That is, the first left side LED board is formed by inserting each positioning protrusion 67 provided in the left side installation area 65 of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) into the positioning hole 121a of the first left side LED board 121. 121 is positioned in the left side installation region 65, and in this state, screws inserted through the through holes 121b of the first left side LED substrate 121 are screwed into corresponding screw holes 68 provided in the left side installation region 65, The first left side LED board 121 is fixed to the left side installation area 65. At this time, each of the through holes 69 for mounting the left side decorative cover 127 faces the fitting hole 121c formed in the first left side LED board 121, and the fitting hole 121c passes through the fitting hole 121c. The opposing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 is exposed to the front side. Further, the lower left LED board 125 is positioned by inserting each positioning protrusion 67 of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) into the positioning hole 125a of the lower left LED board 125, and in this state, the lower left LED board. The lower left LED board 125 is fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 125b of the 125 into the corresponding screw hole 68. At this time, each of the through holes 69 for mounting the left side decorative cover 127 faces the fitting hole 125c formed in the first lower left LED board 125, and the fitting hole 125c passes through the fitting hole 125c. The opposing surface part 52 of the back unit 50 is exposed to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 77 or 78, connector receiving portions 122 are attached to the first left side LED board 121 at the front right lower part, the front left upper part, and the rear left upper part, respectively. The wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 122 positioned is connected to the relay board 702 of the back unit 50, and the wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 122 positioned at the upper left of the back surface is positioned above the side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177. The left panel LED board 174 is connected to the left panel LED board 174 (described later), and the wiring connected to the connector receiving part 122 located at the upper left part of the front surface is located below the side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177. (See FIG. 13). The lower left LED substrate 125 has a plurality of connector receiving portions 126 attached to the back surface, and wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 126 located on the upper left side of the back surface is disposed in the shutter device 500. The wiring connected to the connector receiving part 124 of the second left side LED board 123 and the other connector receiving part 126 is connected to the relay board 702 of the back unit 50 (see FIG. 13). Note that the LED wiring insertion opening 72 is formed in the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 corresponding to the connector receiving portion 122 located at the lower right front portion of the first left LED substrate 121 and the upper left portion of the rear surface. In addition, LED wiring insertion holes 72 are opened corresponding to the respective connector receiving portions 126 of the lower left LED board 125, and wirings connected to these connector receiving portions 122 and 126 are led out to the back side of the back unit 50. To get.

  As shown in FIG. 77 or 78, the left decorative cover 127 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50 so as to cover the front upper portion of the first left LED board 121, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. A left-side mounting base (mounting base) 128 formed of a material, and attached to the box-shaped main body 51 so as to cover the lower front surface of the first left-side LED board 121 and the front side of the lower-left LED board 125, and transparent A left lower mounting base (mounting base) 132 formed from a synthetic resin material, and attached to the front side of the left side mounting base 128 and the left lower mounting base 132, a first left side LED board 121 and a second left side LED board. 123 and a cover body that covers the front side of the lower left LED substrate 125 (hereinafter referred to as a left side cover body 136). That is, the light from the LEDs 89 of the first left LED board 121, the second left LED board 123, and the lower left LED board 125 is transmitted through the left side mounting base 128 and the lower left mounting base 132 located on the front side. The left side cover main body 136 is irradiated. In the embodiment, two mounting bases, the left side mounting base 128 and the left lower mounting base 132, are provided, but a single mounting base may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 77 or 78, the left side mounting base 128 extends rearward from the front plate portion 129 facing the upper front portion of the first left side LED substrate 121 and the outer peripheral edge of the front plate portion 129. It forms in the box shape opened rearward from the rear side support plate part 131 to come out. The front plate part 129 of the left side mounting base 128 has a rear side that can be fitted into the fitting hole part 121c at a position corresponding to the two upper fitting hole parts 121c of the first left side LED board 121. An attachment boss (attachment boss) 130 is formed so as to protrude rearward. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 77 or 78, the lower left mounting base 132 includes a front lower portion of the first left LED board 121 and a front plate portion 129 facing the lower left LED board 125, and the front plate portion 129. It is formed in a box shape that opens rearward from the rear support plate 135 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the face plate portion 129. The front plate part 133 of the lower left mounting base 132 can be fitted into the fitting hole 125c at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 125c provided in the lower left part of the lower left LED board 125. A side mounting boss (mounting boss) 134 is formed so as to protrude rearward.

  When the left side decorative cover 127 (the left side mounting base 128 and the left lower mounting base 132) is disposed in the box-shaped main body 51 (left side mounting area 65) of the back unit 50, the left side mounting base 128 is disposed. And the rear end portions of the rear mounting bosses 130 and 134 of the lower left mounting base 132 are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes 121c and 125c of the first left LED board 121 and the lower left LED board 125, respectively. The position of the front plate portions 129 and 133 of the left side mounting base 128 and the left lower mounting base 132 is restricted at a position where they are in contact with the facing surface portion 52 and spaced apart in front of the first left side LED board 121 and the left lower LED board 125. It has become so. Here, the right side surface of the left side mounting base 128 is formed in a shape that matches the left side surface of the second partition wall 61 formed on the facing surface portion 52 (the surface facing the left image wall), By aligning the right side surface of the left side mounting base 128 with the second partition wall 61, the left side mounting base 128 (left side light emitting decoration device 120) can be positioned.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 77 or 78, the left side mounting base 128 and the left lower mounting base 132 have a plurality of elastically deformable engaging hooks in the vicinity of the rear end as shown in FIG. 131a and 135a are formed. The engagement hooks 131a and 135a are formed on the back when the rear mounting bosses 130 and 134 of the left side mounting base 128 and the left lower mounting base 132 are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes 121c and 125c. The unit 50 is detachably engageable with an engagement hole 85 (only a part of the engagement holes 85 is shown in FIG. 5) formed corresponding to the box-shaped main body 51 of the unit 50. The mounting bosses 130 and 134 are fitted into the fitting holes 121c and 125c, and the engagement hooks 131a and 135a are engaged with the engagement holes 85, so that the box-shaped main body 51 (the left side portion is installed) of the rear unit 50. The left decorative cover 127 is positioned relative to the region 65). Further, screw holes corresponding to the through holes 69 facing the fitting holes 121c and 125c of the first left LED board 121 and the left lower LED board 125 are formed at the rear ends of the rear mounting bosses 130 and 134, respectively. 130a and 134a are formed, and the left-side decorative cover 127 is placed in the left-side installation region by screwing the screw inserted through the through-hole 69 into the screw holes 130a and 134a of the corresponding rear mounting bosses 130 and 134. It is fixed to 65.

  As shown in FIG. 77 or 78, the left side cover body 136 is formed to have a size capable of covering the front side of the first left side LED board 121, the second left side LED 89, and the lower left LED board 125. The decorative plate portion 137 and the front support plate portion 138 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the decorative plate portion 137 are formed in a box shape that opens rearward. That is, between the left image wall of the box-shaped main body 51 and the left end portion of the base frame 502 in the shutter device 500 (the left end portion of the left shutter storage member 507), the lower image wall portion 53d of the box-shaped main body 51 and the shutter device. The decorative plate of the left-side decorative cover 127 extends between the left end portion of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 in 500 (the left end portion of the left shutter housing member 507) and the left side surfaces of the first and second partition walls 76 and 77. The part 137 is configured to be located. And the light of LED89 provided in the said 1st left side LED board 121, the 2nd left side LED89, and the lower left LED board 125 is irradiated to the said decoration board part 137. As shown in FIG. Here, the decorative plate portion 137 of the left-side cover body 136 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially constant thickness from a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and a minute uneven pattern is provided on the front and back surfaces and the front surface ( When the required pattern is drawn on the (decorative surface) and the light of the LED 89 of the first and second left LED boards 121 and 123 and the lower left LED board 125 is irradiated, the front surface of the decorative board 137 The whole is brightened. Further, the decorative plate portion 137 of the left side cover body 136 is configured to be positioned on the same plane as the decorative plate portions 99 and 115 of the left and right upper cover bodies 98 and 114.

  On the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 137 of the left side cover body 136, a front mounting boss 139 having a screw hole 139a formed at the rear end is formed at a plurality of locations so as to protrude rearward, and the front support Positioning protrusions 140 protruding rearward from the plate part 138 are formed at a plurality of locations. The front plate portions 129 and 133 of the left side mounting base 128 and the left lower mounting base 132 are moved forward and backward to positions corresponding to the front mounting bosses 139 and the positioning protrusions 140 formed on the decorative plate portion 137. Through-holes 129b and 133b and positioning holes 129a and 133a are formed, respectively, and the positioning protrusion 140 of the decorative plate portion 137 of the left-side cover body 136 corresponds to the left-side mounting base 128 and the left-lower mounting base 132. In the state of being inserted into the positioning holes 129a and 133a, the screws inserted into the through holes 129b and 133b of the left side mounting base 128 and the left lower mounting base 132 are screw holes 139a of the left side cover body 136 (front mounting boss 139). The left side mounting base 128 and the lower left mounting base 132 and the left side cover main body 136 are fixed. At this time, the rear end portions of the front support plate portion 138 and the front mounting boss 139 are in contact with the front plate portion 129 of the left side mounting base 128 and are separated from the front side of the left side mounting base 128 to separate the decorative plate portion. 137 is located.

  As shown in FIG. 77 or 78, the decorative plate portion 137 of the left decorative cover 127 has a rear side of the regular winning device 48 disposed in the second mounting port 31c located on the left side of the transparent plate 31. A left ball discharge decoration member 141 having a ball passage communicating with the normal winning device 48 is disposed at a position, and a pachinko ball that has won a prize in the normal winning device 48 passes through the left ball discharge decoration member 141. The discharge is guided to the ball collecting portion provided in the middle frame 12. Here, the left sphere discharge decorative member 141 is configured to protrude to the front surface of the decorative plate portion 137 of the left side decorative cover 127, and the front surface of the left sphere discharge decorative member 141 is on the back surface of the transparent plate 31. It is designed to be in close proximity.

  In addition, a composite display device 142 having a special symbol display unit 143 and a normal symbol display unit 144 is disposed on the decorative plate unit 137 of the left side decorative cover 127, and from the front side through the transparent plate 31. The composite display device 142 can be visually recognized. Here, the composite display device 142 is disposed so as to be embedded in an installation recess 136 a formed to open forward in the decorative plate portion 137 of the left side decorative cover 127, and the decorative portion of the left side decorative cover 127 is arranged. The front surface of the composite display device 142 is positioned substantially on the same surface as the front surface of the plate portion 137. The special symbol display unit 143 includes a plurality of special LEDs (not shown) on the substrate, and the special LED is turned on and off in accordance with the winning of the pachinko ball to the start winning device 38. The special symbol is displayed according to the light emission position of the special LED in the result. When the special LED at the specific light emission position emits light, the drive solenoid of the special prize-winning device 43 is driven to open the special prize-winning port 44a. The normal symbol display unit 144 includes a plurality of normal LEDs (none of which are shown) on the substrate, and the normal symbol display unit 144 detects the normal ball by detecting the pachinko ball of the ball detection sensor 213 provided on the frame-shaped decorative body 200. A normal symbol is displayed according to the light emitting position of the normal LED as a result of the fluctuation display of the general LED. And it is comprised so that the drive solenoid 41a of the said start winning device 38 may be driven, and the said lower prize opening may be open | released when normal LED of a specific light emission position light-emits.

(About the right side lighting device)
As shown in FIGS. 9, 10, and 72, the right side light emitting decoration device 145 is disposed in a right side installation region 66 provided on the right side of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). A first right LED substrate (first light emitter substrate) 146 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 89 for irradiating light are mounted, and a lower right front surface of the base frame body 502 in the shutter device 500. The second right side LED substrate (second light emitter substrate) 148 and the rear unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) are disposed at the lower right portion of the second right side LED substrate (second light emitter substrate) 148, and are positioned below the shutter device 500 and forward. A first right lower LED substrate 150 (first light emitter substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 89 for irradiating light are mounted, the first and second right LED substrates 146 and 148, and a lower right LED. Light-transmitting right side decorative cover covering the front side of the substrate 150 ( They consist decoration cover) 152. By emitting the LED89 of each LED substrate 146, 148, 150, so that the right side decorative cover 152 is AkiraTeru. Since the configuration of the second right side LED substrate 148 has been described in accordance with the description of the shutter device 500, a description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the first right-side LED board 146 has front and back at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 67 formed on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 corresponding to the right-side installation region 66. A plurality of positioning holes 146a are formed therethrough, and a plurality of through holes 146b penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes 68 formed in the facing surface portion 52 corresponding to the right-side installation region 66. Has been. Further, positions corresponding to the through holes 69 for mounting the right side decorative cover 152 formed in the facing surface part 52 of the back unit 50 are provided at a plurality of positions spaced apart from each other on the first right side LED board 146. Further, fitting hole portions 146c each having a larger diameter than the through hole 69 are formed. Similarly, in the lower right LED board 150, a plurality of positioning holes 150a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 67 formed on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50. A plurality of through holes 150b penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes 68 formed in the facing surface portion 52.

  That is, by inserting each positioning protrusion 67 provided in the right side installation area 66 of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) into the positioning hole 146a of the first right side LED board 146, the first right side LED board. 146 is positioned in the right side installation area 66, and in this state, the screw inserted into the through hole 146b of the first right side LED board 146 is screwed into the corresponding screw hole 68 provided in the right side installation area 66, The first right side LED board 146 is fixed to the right side installation area 66. At this time, the fitting holes 146c formed in the first right LED board 146 are exposed to the through holes 69 for mounting the right decorative cover 152, and the fitting holes 146c are used to connect the through holes 69c. The facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 is exposed to the front side. Further, the lower right LED board 150 is positioned by inserting the positioning protrusion 67 of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) into the positioning hole 150a of the lower right LED board 150, and in this state, the lower right LED board 150 is positioned. The lower right LED board 150 is fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 150b into the corresponding screw hole 68.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 79 or FIG. 80, connector receiving portions 147 are attached to the first right side LED substrate 146 at the center of the right side of the front surface, the upper right portion of the rear surface, and the lower portion, respectively. The wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 147 to be connected is connected to the relay board 702 of the back unit 50, and the wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 147 located in the upper right portion of the back surface is the upper first right panel in the right side light emitting effect device 177. Connected to the LED board 182 (described later) connected to the connector receiving portion 183 located in the center of the right side of the front surface, the wiring connected to the LED panel 182 for right panel (described later) located on the lower side of the right side light emitting effect device 177 (See FIG. 13). In addition, a plurality of connector receiving portions 151 are attached to the lower right LED substrate 150 on the back surface, and wirings connected to the connector receiving portions 151 are connected to the relay substrate 702 of the back unit 50. In addition, the LED wiring insertion opening 72 is formed in the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50 corresponding to the connector receiving portion 147 located at the upper right portion of the back surface of the first right side LED substrate 146 and the lower right portion of the back surface. In addition, LED wiring insertion openings 72 are provided corresponding to the respective connector receiving portions 151 of the lower right LED board 150, and wirings connected to these connector receiving portions 147 and 151 are led out to the back side of the back unit 50. To get.

  As shown in FIG. 79 or 80, the right side decorative cover 152 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50 so as to cover the upper part of the front surface of the first right side LED board 146, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. A right-side mounting base (mounting base) 153 formed from a material, a front lower portion of the first right-side LED board 146, and a front side of the lower-right LED board 150 are attached to the box-shaped main body 51, and are transparent. A lower right mounting base (mounting base) 157 formed from a synthetic resin material, and attached to the front side of the right side mounting base 153 and the right lower mounting base 157, a first right side LED board 146 and a second right side LED board 148 and a cover body covering the front side of the lower right LED substrate 150 (hereinafter referred to as a right side cover body 161). That is, the light from the LED 89 of the first right side LED board 146, the second right side LED board 148, and the lower right LED board 150 is transmitted through the right side mounting base 153 and the lower right mounting base 157 located on the front side. The right side cover main body 161 is irradiated.

  As shown in FIG. 79 or FIG. 80, the right side mounting base 153 extends rearward from the front plate part 154 facing the front upper part of the first right side LED board 146 and the outer peripheral edge of the front plate part 154. It forms in the box shape opened rearward from the rear side support plate part 156 to take out. The front plate 154 of the right side mounting base 153 has a rear side that can be fitted into the fitting hole 146c at a position corresponding to the two upper fitting holes 146c of the first right LED board 146. An attachment boss (attachment boss) 155 is formed so as to protrude rearward. As shown in FIG. 79 or 80, the lower right mounting base 157 includes a front lower surface of the first right LED substrate 146 and a front plate portion 158 facing the lower right LED substrate 150, and the front plate. It is formed in a box shape that opens rearward from the rear support plate portion 160 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the portion 158.

  When the right-side decorative cover 152 is disposed on the box-shaped main body 51 (right-side installation region 66) of the back unit 50, the rear end of the rear-side mounting boss 155 of the right-side mounting base 153 corresponds to the fitting. The front plate portions 154 and 158 of the right side mounting base 153 and the right lower mounting base 157 are separated from the front of the first right side LED board 146 by fitting into the joint holes 146c and coming into contact with the facing surface portion 52, respectively. The position is regulated by the position. Here, the left side surface of the right side mounting base 153 is formed in a shape that matches the right side surface of the second partition wall 61 formed on the facing surface portion 52 (a surface facing the right drawing wall), By aligning the left side surface of the right side mounting base 153 with the second partition wall 61, the right side mounting base 153 (right side light emitting decoration device 145) can be positioned.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 79 or FIG. 80, a plurality of elastically deformable engagement hooks are provided in the rear support plate portions 156 and 160 on the right side mounting base 153 and the right lower mounting base 157, as shown in FIG. 156a and 160a are formed. The engaging hooks 156a and 160a correspond to the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50 when the rear mounting boss 155 of the right side mounting base 153 is fitted into the corresponding fitting hole 146c. The engagement holes 85 (only some of the engagement holes 85 are shown in FIG. 5) can be detachably engaged, and the rear mounting boss 155 is connected to the engagement hole 146c. When the engagement hooks 156a and 160a are engaged with the engagement holes 85, the right-side decorative cover 152 is positioned with respect to the box-shaped main body 51 (right-side installation region 66) of the back unit 50. It has become so. Further, a screw hole 155a is formed at the rear end of the rear mounting boss 155 corresponding to the through hole 69 facing the fitting hole 146c of the first right side LED board 146. The right-side decorative cover 152 is fixed to the right-side installation region 66 by screwing the screw inserted through 69 into the screw hole 155a of the corresponding rear-side mounting boss 155.

  As shown in FIG. 79 or 80, the right side cover main body 161 is formed to have a size capable of covering the front side of the first right side LED board 146, the second right side LED 89, and the right lower LED board 150. The decorative plate portion 162 and a front support plate portion 163 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the decorative plate portion 162 are formed in a box shape that opens rearward. That is, between the right image wall of the box-shaped main body 51 and the right end portion of the base frame 502 in the shutter device 500 (the right end portion of the right shutter housing member 508), the lower image wall of the box-shaped main body 51 and the shutter device 500 The decorative plate portion 162 of the right decorative cover 152 extends between the right end portion of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 (the right end portion of the right shutter housing member 508) and the right side surfaces of the first and second partition walls 76 and 77. Is configured to be located. Then, the light of the LED 89 provided on the first right side LED board 146, the second right side LED 89, and the lower right LED board 150 is applied to the decorative plate part 162. Here, the decorative plate portion 162 of the right-side cover body 161 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially constant thickness from a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and a minute uneven pattern is provided on the front and back surfaces and the front surface ( When the required pattern is drawn on the decorative surface) and the light of the LED 89 of the first and second right side LED boards 146 and 148 and the lower right LED board 150 is irradiated, the front surface of the decorative plate part 162 is displayed. The whole is brightened. In addition, the decorative plate portion 162 of the right side cover body 161 is configured to be located on the same plane as the left and right upper cover bodies 98 and 114 and the decorative plate portions 99, 115, and 137 of the left side cover body 136. .

  A front mounting boss 164 having a screw hole 164a formed at the rear end is formed at a plurality of locations on the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 162 of the right side cover main body 161, and the front support Positioning protrusions 165 protruding rearward from the plate part 163 are formed at a plurality of locations. The front plate portions 154 and 158 of the right side mounting base 153 and the right lower mounting base 157 have positions corresponding to the screw holes 164a and the positioning protrusions 165 of the front mounting boss 164 formed in the decorative plate portion 162. Further, through holes 154b and 158b and positioning holes 154a and 158a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed, respectively, and the positioning protrusion 165 of the decorative plate portion 162 of the right-side cover body 161 is attached to the right-side mounting base 153 and the lower right-side mounting. In the state of being inserted into the corresponding positioning holes 154a and 158a of the base 157, screws inserted into the through holes 154b and 158b of the right side mounting base 153 and the right lower mounting base 157 are inserted into the right side cover body 161 (front mounting boss 164). The right side mounting base 153 and the right lower mounting base 157 and the right side cover body 161 are fixed by screwing into the screw holes 164a. Determined. At this time, the rear end portions of the front support plate portion 163 and the front mounting boss 164 abut against the front plate portions 154 and 158 of the right side mounting base 153 and the right lower mounting base 157, and the front side of the right side mounting base 153. The decorative plate portion 162 is positioned so as to be spaced apart from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 79 or 80, the decorative plate portion 162 of the right decorative cover 152 has a rear side of the normal winning device 48 disposed in the second mounting port 31c located on the right side of the transparent plate 31. A right ball discharge decoration member 166 having a ball passage communicating with the normal winning device 48 is disposed at a position, and the pachinko ball that has won the normal winning device 48 is provided in the middle frame 12. Discharge guidance is provided to the collection unit. Here, the right sphere discharge decorative member 166 is configured to protrude to the front surface of the decorative plate portion 162 of the right side decorative cover 152, and the front surface of the right sphere discharge decorative member 166 is on the back surface of the transparent plate 31. It is designed to be in close proximity.

  Here, in a state where the left and right upper decorative covers 93 and 108 and the left and right decorative covers 127 and 152 are fixed to the back unit 50, the left and right upper cover main bodies 98 and 114 and the left and right cover main bodies 136 and 161 are fixed. The front surfaces (decorative surfaces) of the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162 are defined by the opening front end portions of the respective image wall portions 53a, 53b, 53c, 53d in the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). The decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, and 162 are held at substantially the same plane as the opening surface and are substantially parallel to the back surface of the transparent plate 31 (FIGS. 4, 6, and 81). 82). Here, in the embodiment, the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162 of the left and right upper cover bodies 98, 114 and the left and right side cover bodies 136, 161 are provided in the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). The thickness of the left transparent panel 171 (described later) and the fixed walls 187, 191 of the side light emitting effect devices 170, 177 rather than the opening surfaces defined by the opening front end portions of the respective wall portions 53a, 53b, 53c, 53d. It is located rearward by the dimension. That is, in the configuration of “located substantially in the same plane as the opening front end portions of the image wall portions 53a, 53b, 53c, 53d in the back unit 50”, the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162 are completely included in each image wall. The plate-like body (transparent panel or Including a state in which the fixed wall portion is located on the same plane as the opening surface area formed by the opening front end portions of the respective image wall portions 53a, 53b, 53c, 53d, and the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162 are transparent plates What is necessary is just the structure which adjoins with respect to the back surface of 31.

(About the central light emitting decoration device)
The central light emitting decoration device 167 is disposed in a central installation region 64 provided on the upper side of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), and a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) 89 that irradiate light forward are mounted. The central LED board 168 and a transparent transparent protective cover 169 that covers the front side of the upper left LED board 91 are attached to the frame-shaped decorative body 200 by emitting light from the LED 89 of the central LED board 168. The produced effect unit 201 can be illuminated from the back side. The transparent protective cover 169 prevents various members from coming into contact with the central LED substrate 168 when the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 are assembled. The central LED board 168 and the transparent protective cover 169 are cut out at positions corresponding to the solenoid insertion openings 74 formed in the facing surface portion 52.

(About the side lighting device)
The side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 arranged on the front side of the left and right upper and left and right side light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120 and 145 are as shown in FIGS. 4, 9, 81 and 82. In addition, the left side light emitting effect device 170 that faces the back surface of the transparent plate 31 and can emit and display a required symbol on the left side of the game area 32, and the right side of the game area 32 that faces the back surface of the transparent plate 31. The right side light emitting effect device 177 capable of emitting and displaying a required symbol on the right side, and the right and left side light effect devices 170 and 177 can decorate the game area 32 by displaying the light on the entire display. It has become. The side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 are electrically connected to the control device 700 installed on the back side of the middle frame 12, and are based on a control signal from the control device 700. The display / non-display of symbols is controlled (see FIG. 13).

  Here, the left side light emitting effect device 170 includes a left upper decorative cover 93 (decorative plate portion 99) of the upper left light emitting decorative device 90 and a left decorative cover 127 (decorative plate portion 137) of the left light emitting decorative device 120. Left transparent panel (transparent panel) 171 that covers the front surface of the left transparent panel so that it can be seen through from the front side, and left illumination means that is provided at the left end of the left transparent panel 171 and that irradiates light toward the end surface of the left transparent panel 171 172. Similarly, the right side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 include the right upper decorative cover 108 (decorative plate portion 115) of the right upper light emitting decorative device 105 and the right decorative cover 152 (decorative plate) of the right light emitting decorative device 145. A right transparent panel (transparent panel) 178 that covers the front surface of the portion 162) in a transparent manner from the front side, and is provided at the right end of the right transparent panel 178, and emits light toward the end surface of the right transparent panel 178 And right side illumination means 179.

(About the left and right transparent panels)
A portion of the left transparent panel 171 that overlaps the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left light emitting decoration device 90 is formed in a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left light emitting decoration device 90, and The portion of the left transparent panel 171 that overlaps the decorative plate portion 137 of the left side light emitting decoration device 120 is formed in a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the decorative plate portion 137 of the left side light emitting decoration device 120 (FIG. 9). reference). The left transparent panel 171 extends so as to overlap the front side of the left shutter housing member 507 in the shutter device 500. Similarly, a portion of the right transparent panel 178 that overlaps the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right light emitting decoration device 105 is formed in a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right light emitting decoration device 105. At the same time, the portion of the right transparent panel 178 that overlaps the decorative plate portion 162 of the right side light emitting decoration device 145 is formed in a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the decorative plate portion 162 of the right side light emitting decoration device 142. . The right transparent panel 178 extends so as to overlap the front side of the right shutter housing member 508 in the shutter device 500. Here, in the right transparent panel 178, an end face aligned with the inclined wall part 114a defining the concave part 119 of the upper right light emitting decoration device 105 is referred to as an inclined end face 178d (see FIG. 85).

  As shown in FIG. 83, the left transparent panel 171 includes a left upper decorative cover 93 (decorative plate portion 99) of the left upper light emitting decorative device 90 and a left decorative cover 127 (decorative plate) of the left light emitting decorative device 120. Positioning holes 171a and through-holes 171b penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the front-rear positions of the positioning protrusions 99a, 137a and screw holes 99b, 137b (see FIGS. 75 and 77) formed on the front side of the portion 137). The left upper decorative cover 93 is formed by inserting the positioning protrusions 99a and 137a into the corresponding positioning holes 171a and screwing the screws inserted through the through holes 171b into the screw holes 99b and 137b, respectively. The left transparent panel 171 is fixed to the left decorative cover 127. Similarly, on the right transparent panel 178, as shown in FIG. 84, the right upper decorative cover 108 (decorative plate portion 115) of the upper right light emitting decorative device 105 and the right decorative cover 152 of the right light emitting decorative device 145 are provided. The positioning projections 115a and 162a and the screw holes 115b and 162b (see FIGS. 76 and 78) formed on the front surface side of the (decoration plate portion 162) and the positioning holes 178a penetrating in the front-rear direction and the through holes are provided at positions corresponding to the front and rear. Holes 178b are respectively formed, and the positioning protrusions 115a and 162a are inserted into the corresponding positioning holes 178a, and the screws inserted through the through holes 178b are screwed into the screw holes 115b and 162b. A right transparent panel 178 is fixed to the decorative cover 108 and the right decorative cover 152.

  Here, the left sphere discharge decoration member 141 is inserted into the left transparent panel 171 at a position corresponding to the left sphere discharge decoration member 141 provided on the left side decoration cover 127 of the left side light emitting decoration device 120. A possible insertion hole 171c is formed, and the right transparent panel 178 has a position corresponding to the right sphere discharge decorative member 166 provided on the right decorative cover 152 of the right light emitting decorative device 145. An insertion hole 178c into which the right sphere discharge decorative member 166 can be inserted is formed, and the transparent panels 171 and 178 are respectively attached to the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, and 162 of the corresponding decorative covers 93, 108, 127, and 152. It can come into contact with each other. And in the state which combined the said left side transparent panel 171 and the right side transparent panel 178, the opening front end side formed by each image wall part 53a-53d of the said back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) is made into both panels 171,178. It is comprised so that it may coat | cover entirely.

  Here, in the state where the left transparent panel 171 and the right transparent panel 178 are combined, an opening region that substantially matches the through hole 30a of the transparent plate 31 is defined (see FIG. 4 or FIG. 9). ), The upper outer peripheral wall 225 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 protruding rearward of the transparent plate 31 faces the inside of the opening region, and the opening region side of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 (the through hole of the transparent plate 31). 31a side). That is, the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are formed so as to surround substantially the entire circumference of the opening 52a of the facing surface portion 52 in the back unit 50, and are entirely visible from the front side through the transparent plate 31. The left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are located. The left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are located at the same position where the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left light emitting decorative device 90 and the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right light emitting decorative device 105 are aligned. The matching parts of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are difficult to discriminate.

  On the back surfaces of the left and right transparent panels 171, 178, by forming minute irregularities, a required pattern (in the example, a star shape is taken as an example, but a shape related to a character that is a motif of a gaming machine, Other light may be drawn), and light introduced into the transparent panels 171 and 178 from the outer peripheral end face is reflected by the minute uneven portions representing the design, so that the design is brightened. It is configured to be visible from the front side. Here, the pattern drawn on the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 overlaps the front side of the decorative covers 93, 108, 127, and 152 of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145, thereby It is difficult to visually recognize from the front side due to the symbols drawn on the covers 93, 108, 127 and 152. In addition, the light irradiated from the front and rear surfaces of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 is transmitted without being reflected by the minute uneven portions representing the design so that the design is hardly visible from the front side. Is done. That is, the symbols of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are not displayed so as to stand out when the light from the LED 197 of each of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 located on the back side is irradiated to the back surface. When the light emitted from the illumination means 172, 179 is introduced into the inside from the outer peripheral end face, the light is displayed so as to be visible from the front side. In addition, as a pattern formation method for the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178, various methods such as a laser engraving method can be used as in the pattern formation method for the circular transparent panel 326 of the upper light emitting effect device 302. Is possible. Further, as the LED 197, either a single color or a full color type can be used, but a full color type is preferable in that the emission color is changed according to the production.

(Left and right side lighting means)
As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the left illuminating means 172 includes a non-light transmissive left shielding member 173 formed of an opaque synthetic resin material covering the left end of the left transparent panel 171 and the left side. The left panel LED substrate 174 is mounted on the left end surface of the left transparent panel 171 and has a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 197 mounted thereon. The left panel LED board 174 is electrically connected to the control device 700 installed on the back side of the middle frame 12 (see FIG. 13), and based on a control signal from the control device 700 By causing the LED 197 of the substrate 174 to emit light, the symbols provided on the left transparent panel 171 are brightly displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the right illumination means 179 includes a non-light transmissive right shielding member 180 formed of an opaque synthetic resin material covering the right end of the right transparent panel 178, and A non-light transmissive upper shielding member 181 formed of an opaque synthetic resin material covering the concave portion 119 formed in the upper right decorative cover 108 of the upper right light emitting decoration device 105, and the right shielding member 180. The right transparent panel 178 has a first right panel LED board 182 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 197 capable of irradiating light are mounted on the right end surface of the right transparent panel 178, and the upper transparent member 181. The LED panel 184 for the second right panel on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 197 capable of irradiating light is mounted on the inclined end surface 178d facing the concave portion 119 side. The first and second right panel LED boards 182 and 184 are electrically connected to the control device 700 installed on the back side of the middle frame 12 (see FIG. 13). The symbols provided on the right transparent panel 178 are brightly displayed by causing the LEDs 197 on the substrates 182 and 184 to emit light based on the control signal.

  The left shielding member 173 that covers the left outer peripheral end surface of the left transparent panel 171 is formed to extend over the entire length of the left image wall 53c of the back unit 50, and the left end surface of the left transparent panel 171. It is comprised so that the whole (specific outer peripheral end surface) may be covered (refer FIG. 4 or FIG. 9). The right shielding member 180 covering the right outer peripheral end surface of the right transparent panel 178 is formed so as to extend over approximately 3/4 above and below the right wall portion 53d of the back unit 50. Here, since the basic configuration of the left shielding member 173 of the left illumination means 172 and the right shielding member 180 of the right illumination means 179 is the same, the configuration of the left shielding member 173 will be mainly described. The members 180 are denoted by the same reference numerals with respect to the same configuration, and detailed description thereof is omitted. The left shielding member 173 is a flat plate-shaped first portion fixed to the left stepped portion 56a (the right stepped portion 57a of the right fixing portion 57 in the right shielding member 180) provided in the left fixing portion 56 of the back unit 50. 1 fixed wall 187, and provided at the right end of the first fixed wall 187 and extending rearward so as to face the first substrate housing space 86 (second substrate housing space 87 in the right shielding member 180), A first substrate support portion 188 facing the left end surface of the left transparent panel 171 and a right end portion (left end portion in the right shielding member 180) of the first fixed wall 187 are provided. The member 180 includes a flat plate-shaped first shielding wall 189 that faces the front surface of the right transparent panel 178), and the first fixing wall 187 and the first fixing wall 187 are fixed to the left stepped portion 56a. 1 shielding wall 18 The front is adapted to abut against the rear surface of the transparent plate 31 located on the front and the same surface of the left fixing portion 56. In the embodiment, the first substrate support portion 188 of the left shielding member 173 is divided into a plurality of upper and lower portions (three in the embodiment), and the first substrate support portion 188 of the right shielding member 180 is divided into a plurality of upper and lower portions (implementation). In the example, it is divided into two).

  On the rear surface side of the first fixed wall 187, at a position corresponding to the left support boss 86a (first right support boss 87a in the right shielding member 180) formed on the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), A first cylindrical support portion 190 that opens to the rear is formed, and the left shielding member 173 is positioned by inserting the left support boss 86a into the first cylindrical support portion 190. . In addition, the first fixed wall 187 has a through hole 187a (through the front and rear) corresponding to the screw hole 56b (see FIG. 9) of the left stepped portion 56a (the right stepped portion 57a in the right shielding member 180). 9 and 83, a through hole 190a of the first cylindrical support part 190 located at the uppermost part of the left shielding member 173 is formed), and is inserted into the through hole 187a of the first fixed wall 187. A screw is screwed into the screw hole 56b of the corresponding left stepped portion 56a, and a screw inserted through the through hole 190a of the first cylindrical support portion 190 is screwed into the screw hole 86b of the left support boss 86a. The left shielding member 173 is fixed to the back unit 50. Here, in a state in which the left shielding member 173 is fixed to the back unit 50, the first shielding wall 189 is positioned so as to overlap the front surface of the left transparent panel 171 (or the right transparent panel 178 in the right shielding member 180). The front opening of the first substrate housing space 86 (the second substrate housing space 87 in the right shielding member 180) is closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the left panel LED substrate 174 is composed of two upper and lower substrates formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction, and is orthogonal (intersect) to the mounting surface of each substrate. The LED 197 is mounted so as to irradiate light in the direction in which the light is emitted. Each LED panel 174 for the left panel is fixed to the first substrate support portion 188 of the left shielding member 173 and accommodated in the first substrate accommodating space 86. Further, the wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 175 provided in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the LED panel 174 for the left panel located on the upper side is the left upper light emitting decoration device 90 formed on the facing surface portion 52 of the back unit 50. Is inserted into the LED wiring insertion opening 72 formed below the terminal unit and connected to the relay board 702 of the back unit 50 (see FIG. 13). And in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the LED panel 174 for the left panel located on the lower side, it is connected to the connector receiving portion 122 provided on the upper left portion of the first left side LED board 121 in the left side light emitting decoration device 120. A connector receiving portion 175 to which wiring is connected is provided.

  Further, each LED 197 of the left panel LED board 174 accommodated in the first substrate accommodating space 86 is held in a posture facing the left end surface of the left transparent panel 171 as shown in FIG. Light can be irradiated toward the left end face. Similarly, each LED 197 of the first right panel LED board 182 housed in the second board housing space 87 is held in a posture facing the right end surface of the right transparent panel 178, as shown in FIG. Light can be irradiated toward the right end surface of the right transparent panel 178. Here, the LED 197 of the left panel LED board 174 and the LED 197 of the first right panel LED board 182 are opposed to the end faces of the corresponding left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 facing the first and second board housing spaces 86 and 87. When each LED 197 is turned on, the light introduced into the inside from the end faces of the corresponding left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 is reflected by the minute uneven portions of the pattern formed on the transparent panels 171 and 178. Thus, the design is configured to be visible from the front side. Then, when the LED 197 of the left illumination means 172 is turned on, the light transmitted to the right end surface of the left transparent panel 171 passes through the upper outer peripheral wall 225 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 to the first inner peripheral wall 230. The first inner peripheral wall 230 that has been irradiated and subjected to the light diffusion treatment is brightened. Similarly, when the LED 197 of the first right panel LED board 182 is turned on, the light transmitted to the right end surface of the right transparent panel 178 passes through the upper outer peripheral wall 225 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. The second inner peripheral wall irradiated with the inner peripheral wall 2 and subjected to the light diffusion process is brightened.

  The upper shielding member 181 has a flat plate-like second fixed wall 191 that covers the front opening of the concave portion 119 formed in the upper right decorative cover 108, and is provided on the second fixed wall 191 so as to face the concave portion 119. A second substrate support 192 extending rearward and facing the inclined end surface of the right transparent panel 178, and a flat plate-shaped first plate provided on the second fixed wall 191 and facing the front surface of the right transparent panel 178. 2 shielding walls 193. On the rear surface side of the second fixed wall 191 portion, a position corresponding to the second right support boss 113 formed in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the right image wall portion 53d of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), and A second cylindrical support portion 194 opening rearward is formed at a position corresponding to the second right support boss 113 of the upper right light emitting decoration device 105 facing the concave portion 119, and the first and second right portions By inserting the support bosses 87a and 113 into the second cylindrical support portion 194, the second substrate support portion 192 of the upper shielding member 181 is positioned in an inclined posture facing the inclined wall portion 114a of the upper right decorative cover 108. It has come to be. In addition, the second cylindrical support portion 194 is formed with through holes 194a that open in the front-rear direction corresponding to the screw holes 87b, 113a of the first and second right support bosses 87a, 113. The upper shielding member 181 is fixed to the back unit 50 by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 194a of the cylindrical support portion 194 into the screw holes 87b and 113a of the first and second right support bosses 87a and 113. . Here, in a state in which the upper shielding member 181 is fixed, the front surfaces of the second fixed wall 191 and the second shielding wall 193 are located on the same plane as the front surfaces of the left and right shielding members 173 and 180, and the transparent plate 31. The second shielding wall 193 is positioned so as to overlap the front surface of the right transparent panel 178, and closes the front opening of the concave portion 119.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the LED substrate 184 for the second right panel is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction, and the LED 197 emits light in a direction orthogonal (crossing) to the mounting surface of each substrate. Has been implemented. Each second right panel LED board 184 is fixed to the second board support part 192 of the upper shielding member 181 and accommodated in the concave part 119. Further, the wiring connected to the connector receiving portion 185 provided on the second right panel LED board 184 is connected to the connector receiving portion 183 provided near the upper end of the first right panel LED board 182. The second right panel LED board 184 is connected to the relay board 702 of the back unit 50 via the first right panel LED board 182 (see FIG. 13). Further, each LED 197 of the second right panel LED substrate 184 accommodated in the concave portion 119 is held in a posture facing the inclined end surface 178d of the right transparent panel 178, and an upper portion (upper fixing portion) of the right transparent panel 178 is held. The light can be irradiated toward a portion overlapping the upper stepped portion 83 of 54. In other words, each LED 197 of the second right panel LED substrate 184 is reflected by a minute uneven portion of the pattern formed on the upper portion of the right transparent panel 178 (the portion overlapping the upper step portion 83 of the upper fixing portion 54). Thus, the symbol is configured to be visible from the front side, and the symbol can be clearly displayed on the upper portion of the game area 32.

(Effects of Example)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment configured as described above will be described.

  Pachinko balls that have been launched from the ball striking device 17 provided in the middle frame 12 and passed through the launch passage 34a of the guide rail 34 provided in the game board 30 are launched into the game area 32 and the game area. The game is played by winning through various winning devices 38, 43, 48 in the process of flowing down the flow 32. When this pachinko ball is detected by the ball detection sensor 213 disposed on the frame-shaped decorative body 200, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed in the control device 700. If the winning is determined as a result of the lottery, the winning symbol is displayed by the normal LED of the normal symbol display unit 144, and the blade members 42, 42 of the starting prize-winning device 38 are opened, and the starting prize is displayed. Pachinko balls are allowed to enter the lower start winning opening 40b of the device 38. Further, when the pachinko ball flowing down the game area 32 enters the ball passage portion 274 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200, the pachinko ball is passed through the stage portion 271 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200, and the stage portion 271 is After rolling to the left and right, the pachinko ball is discharged to the game area 32, and the pachinko ball can be awarded to a start winning device or a normal winning tool.

  When a pachinko ball wins the start winning device 38, the control device 700 performs a lottery lottery, and based on the control signal of the control device 700, the symbols of the symbol display device 19 start to change and the required symbol changes Production is developed. If the lottery results in a big win, as a result of the symbol variation effect, the symbol display device 19 and the special symbol display unit 143 display special symbols on the special LED in a predetermined combination, and the special prize is displayed. The opening / closing door 47 of the device 43 is opened, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. The shutter member 503 (532, 533) of the shutter device 500 and the frame-shaped decorative body 200 provided in the back unit 50 are provided according to the symbol variation effect developed by the symbol display device 19. The tuft-like body 312 of the staging unit 201 is actuated, and the entertainment of the game is enhanced by the dynamic presentation by the operation of the shutter member 503 (532, 533) and the tuft-like body 312. In addition, the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, and 167, the side light emission effect devices 170 and 177 arranged in the back unit 50, and the upper part of the effect unit 201 provided in the frame-shaped decorative body 200. The light emitting effect device 302 also performs the light emitting effect under the control of the control device, and improves the fun of the game by the effect of light emission.

(About assembly of game board)
The game board 30 has the transparent plate 31 disposed on the front side of the back unit 50, aligns the outline of the transparent plate 31 and the outline of the back unit 50, and inserts into the insertion hole 31 d formed in the transparent plate 31. The screw is inserted into the transparent plate 31 in a state where the fitting protrusion 59 formed in the back unit 50 is fitted, and the rear surface of the transparent plate 31 is entirely covered with the back unit 50. Here, the transparent board 31 constituting the game board 30 is provided with a frame-shaped decorative body 200 provided with an effect unit 201 at an upper position of the window 200a in a through-hole 31a opened in the transparent board 31. In addition, a start winning device 38 and a special winning device 43 are disposed in the first mounting port 31b opened below the through hole 31a, so that the effect unit 201, the starting winning device 38, and the special winning device are arranged. The wiring connected to 43 is led out to the back side of the transparent plate 31. The back unit 50 constituting the game board 30 includes a first housing portion 76a capable of housing the device main body 41 of the start winning device 38 at a position corresponding to the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43, and A second housing portion 77a capable of housing the device main body 45 of the special prize winning device 43 is formed, and wiring that opens in the front-rear direction and communicates with the second housing portion 77a in the back unit 50 (lower fixing portion 55). The insertion notch 55a is formed so as to open below the back unit 50 (lower fixing portion 55).

  Therefore, the wiring of the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 provided on the transparent plate 31 side is routed to the back side (second housing portion 77a) of the back unit 50 through the wiring insertion notch 55a. Can do. That is, the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 can be assembled in a state where the wiring connected to the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 is retracted to the wiring insertion notch 55a formed in the back unit 50. Therefore, the workability of the assembling work of the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 is improved. Here, the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 are located immediately above the out port 36c formed in the transparent plate 31 (the flat plate portion 36b of the inner rail 36), and the wiring insertion notch portion 55a. Is formed so as to be aligned in the front-rear direction with a ball discharge notch 36f of the transparent plate 36c formed corresponding to the out port 36c. That is, when the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 are assembled, the wiring connected to the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 is connected to the out port 36c side of the transparent plate 31 (the lower side of the back unit 50). It is possible to make the wiring face the wiring insertion notch 55a simply by pulling the wire to the wire, and there is an advantage that confirmation of the wiring catching can be easily performed. Here, the first housing portion 76a and the second housing portion 77a are configured to communicate with each other via a communication port 77b formed in the second partition wall 77 that defines the second housing portion 77a. Therefore, the wiring of the start winning device 38 routed to the back side (second housing part 77a) of the back unit 50 through the wiring insertion notch part 55a is connected to the first housing part 76a through the communication port 77b. The wiring of the start winning device 38 is not pinched.

  Further, the back unit 50 has a first housing for housing the device main body 41 of the start winning device 38 by the first partition wall 76 formed so as to protrude forward from the facing surface portion 52 facing the transparent plate 31. A portion 76a is defined, and a first accommodating portion 76a for accommodating the device main body 41 of the start winning device 38 is defined by the second partition wall 77 formed so as to protrude forward from the facing surface portion 52. Yes. That is, by the first partition wall 76 and the second partition wall 77, the shutter device 500, the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167 and the side light emitting effect devices 170, 177 in the back unit 50 are arranged. Since the area and the receiving portions 76a and 77a of the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 are separated, the wiring of the starting winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 received in the receiving portions 76a and 77a is a shutter device. 500, the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145, 167 and the side light emitting effect devices 170, 177 can be prevented from being caught, and the workability of the assembling work of the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 can be improved.

  Further, the front end portion of the first partition wall 76 formed on the back unit 50 is covered with the first mounting base plate 39 of the start winning device 38, and the front end portion of the second partition wall 77 is It is covered with the second mounting base plate 44 of the special winning device 43, and the opening side end of the wiring insertion notch 55a is covered with the flat plate portion 36b of the inner rail 36 in which the out port 36c is formed. It is configured. At this time, the first and second mounting base plates 39 and 44 are formed of an opaque synthetic resin material so that the first and second mounting base plates 39 and 44 and the back side of the flat plate portion 36b cannot be seen through from the front side. Further, the first and second mounting base plates 39 are configured so that the flat plate portion 36b of the inner rail 36 is subjected to light diffusion processing so that the rear side of the flat plate portion 36b is difficult to see through from the front side. , 44, and the back side of the back unit 50 from the front side of the transparent plate 31 (game board 30) through the flat plate portion 36b. The lower end portion of the first mounting base plate 39 and the upper end portion of the second mounting base plate 44 are close to each other, and the lower end portion of the second mounting base plate 44 and the upper end portion of the flat plate portion 36b are close to each other. Therefore, the back side of the back unit 50 is prevented from being visually recognized from the front side of the transparent plate 31 (game board 30) through the first and second housing portions 76a and 77a and the wiring insertion notch 55a. Yes, the appearance of the game board 30 is not impaired.

  On the other hand, in the upper center of the back unit 50, an upper center wiring insertion hole 71 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed, and wiring connected to the effect unit 201 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 provided in the transparent plate 31. Is inserted into the back side of the back unit 50 through the upper central wiring insertion port 71. That is, in the game board 30 of the embodiment, as a specific procedure for assembling the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50, the central wiring insertion in which the wiring of the effect unit 201 located above the transparent plate 31 is formed in the back unit 50. Assembling by retracting the wiring connected to the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 to the wiring insertion notch portion 55a formed in the back unit 50 in the state of being inserted through the opening 71 in advance. It is done. Alternatively, the wiring connected to the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 is led out to the back side of the back unit 50 through the wiring insertion notch 55a formed in the back unit 50 as described above. Thus, the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 can be assembled by inserting the wiring of the effect unit 201 located above the transparent plate 31 through the central wiring insertion port 71 formed in the back unit 50. As described above, it is necessary to simultaneously lead out the wiring of the rendering unit 201 located above the transparent plate 31 and the wiring of the start winning device 38 and the special winning device 43 located below the back unit 50. Therefore, the assembly workability of the transparent plate 31 and the back unit 50 can be improved.

  By the way, if the upper center wiring insertion port 71 is a notch that also opens above the back unit 50 (upper fixing portion 54), the above-described start winning device 38 and special prizes are also provided for the wiring of the effect unit 201. Similarly to the wiring of the winning device 43, the wiring of the effect unit 201 can be led out to the back side of the back unit 50 only by pulling it above the back unit 50, and the confirmation of the hooking of the wiring is also possible. There is an advantage that can be easily done. In this case, since notched portions are formed in the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the back unit 50, there is a possibility that the rigidity of the back unit 50 may be reduced. In some cases, reinforcement for reinforcing the back unit 50 is provided. It is necessary to provide a separate member. On the other hand, in the embodiment, since the upper central wiring insertion port 71 is formed so as to open at the front and rear of the back unit 50, the rigidity of the back unit 50 can be prevented from being lowered more than necessary. There is no need to reinforce the unit 50 specially.

(About lighting of game boards with light emitting decoration devices)
Next, the board illumination of the game board 30 assembled as described above will be described. The box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50 surrounds an opening 52a (an outer periphery of the shutter device 500 disposed on the front side of the opening 52a) formed in the facing surface portion 52 of the box-shaped main body 51. The upper left light emitting decoration device 90, the upper right light emitting decoration device 105, the left side light emitting decoration device 120, the right side light emitting decoration device 145, and the central light emitting decoration device 167 are disposed, and the left and right upper and left and right side light emission are disposed. The entire back side of the game area 32 in the transparent plate 31 is covered by the decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145. Here, the decorative plate portions 99, 115, and 137 of the decorative covers 93, 108, 127, and 152 that constitute the light emitting decorative devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 at the left and right upper portions and the left and right side portions, respectively. 162, the front surface (decorative surface) of the rear unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) is positioned substantially flush with the opening surface defined by the opening front ends of the respective wall portions 53a, 53b, 53c, 53d. At the same time, since the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162 are configured to be substantially parallel to the back surface of the transparent plate 31, the LED substrates 91, 105, 120, 145 of the light emitting decorative devices 90, 105, 120, 145 are provided. 106, 121, 123, 125, 146, 148, 150 LED 89 emits light to brighten the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162, so that the entire transparent plate 31 (game area 32) can be seen from the back side. Can be illuminated wear.

  As described above, the entire transparent plate 31 (game area 32) is illuminated and decorated by the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 on the left and right upper and left and right sides provided in the back unit 50. As a result, the decorativeness of the game board 30 is greatly improved compared to a configuration in which a cell sheet on which a required pattern or the like is drawn is attached to a board surface of a game board formed of wood such as a plywood board, and the pachinko machine 10 Along with improving the added value, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. At this time, the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162 of the left and right upper and left and right side light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145 are respectively connected to the left and right transparent panels 171 in the side light emitting effect devices 170, 177. , 178 and the shielding walls 189, 193, and the decorative plates 99, 115, 137, 162 are located in close proximity to the back surface of the transparent plate 31 only by being separated from the back surface of the transparent plate 31 by the thickness of each of the decorative plates. Various symbols of the plate parts 99, 115, 137, 162 appear to be drawn on the transparent plate 31, and a cell sheet on which the required symbols are drawn is pasted on the surface of the game board formed of wood such as plywood. The game can be played without a sense of incompatibility compared with the case of wearing.

  In the embodiment, the decorative covers 93, 108, 127, and 152 of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 at the left and right upper portions and the left and right side portions have the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, and 162, respectively. It is composed of cover bodies 98, 114, 136, 161 on the left and right upper and left and right sides, and mounting bases 94, 109, 128, 132, 153, 157 fixed to the box-shaped body 51 of the back unit 50, A certain distance is secured between each LED board 91, 106, 121, 123, 125, 146, 148, 150 of the light emitting decoration device 90, 105, 120, 145 and each of the decoration plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162. It is configured to For this reason, when the LEDs 89 of the LED boards 91, 106, 121, 123, 125, 146, 148, 150 of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145 on the left and right upper parts and the left and right sides are caused to emit light, Each of the corresponding decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162 can be illuminated with a constant luminance as a whole, and the decorativeness of the game board 30 with light can be enhanced.

  Further, since the LEDs 89 of the left and right upper and left and right side light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 are controlled to emit light according to a control signal from the control device 700, the symbols developed by the symbol display device 19. By changing the light emission mode (lighting / extinguishing, brightness, etc.) of the LED 89 of each light emitting decoration device 90, 105, 120, 145 according to the variation effect, it becomes possible to produce a light effect using the entire board surface of the game board 30, Diversification of game production can be achieved. Here, the left and right upper and left and right side light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 are disposed in the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50. There is no need to form mounting holes for mounting 90, 105, 120, and 145, and the rigidity of the transparent plate 31 (game board 30) is not reduced.

  Further, the decorative covers 93, 108, 127, 152 of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145 on the left and right upper and left and right side portions are located on the front side in the opening 52a of the back unit 50 (opposing surface portion 52). Since the shutter device 500 is provided so as to surround the shutter device 500, the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 on the left and right upper and left and right sides improve the decorativeness of the game board 30 and the shutter member 503 of the shutter device 500. By the operation of (532, 533), it is possible to produce an effect by the operation of opening and closing the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 facing from the opening 52a. Here, the second left and right side LED boards 123 and 148 in the left and right side light emitting decoration devices 120 and 145 are disposed on the base frame body 502 of the shutter device 500, and the second left and right side LEDs are arranged. Since the front sides of the substrates 123 and 148 are covered with the corresponding left and right decorative covers 127 and 152, the entire outer periphery of the display space 501 defined in the base frame 502 can be decorated with light, and the game board The decorativeness of 30 is further improved.

  The decorative plate portions 99 and 115 of the upper and lower decorative covers 93 and 108 in the left and right upper light emitting decoration devices 90 and 105 face the upper stepped portion 83 provided in the upper fixing portion 54 of the back unit 50. The illumination window portion 84 (second window portion 84b) formed on the upper fixing portion 54 is configured to be covered with the decorative plate portions 99 and 115 of the upper and left decorative covers 93 and 108. Here, the illumination window portion 84 formed in the back unit 50 is formed in the first window portion 84 a defined in the upper wall portion 53 a of the box-shaped main body 51 and the upper fixing portion 54. The second window portion 84b is formed so as to continue from the upper wall portion 53a to the upper fixing portion 54. For this reason, it is provided on the LED substrates 91 and 106 of the left and right upper light emitting decoration devices 90 and 105 and the LED substrate 168 of the central light emitting decoration device 167 disposed at the upper position of the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50. The light of the LED 89 is transmitted to the decorative plate portions 99 and 115 of the upper and lower decorative covers 93 and 108 located at the upper step portion 83 of the upper fixing portion 54 via the first window portion 84a and the second window portion 84b. Irradiation can brighten the decorative plate portions 99 and 115 located on the front side of the upper fixing portion 54.

  That is, by forming the illumination window portion 84 (the first window portion 84a and the b second window portion 84b) on the upper wall portion 53a and the upper fixing portion 54 of the box-shaped main body 51 in the back unit 50, It is possible to illuminate the front side of the upper position (upper fixing portion 54) of the game board 30 that overlaps with the ball tank 26 provided in the frame 12 in the front and rear and cannot ensure the front and rear dimensions. The decorativeness can be improved. In the embodiment, the upper step portion 83 of the upper fixing portion 54 is formed in an arc shape that bulges upward, and the upper edge of the upper step portion 83 is disposed on the transparent plate 31. It is provided at a position that substantially aligns with the outer rail 35 in the front-rear direction, and is configured such that substantially the entire upper step portion 83 faces the inside of the game area 32, and the upper edge of the opening of the second window portion 84b is also the same. Further, the upper stepped portion 83 is formed in an arc shape extending along the upper end edge (outer rail 35). For this reason, when the decorative plate portions 99 and 115 constituting the left and right upper light emitting decoration devices 90 and 105 are brightened by the light irradiated through the second window portion 84b (illumination window portion 84). The upper portion of the game area 32 can be illuminated according to the shape of the game area 32, and the decorativeness of the game board 30 is further improved.

  In addition, when the left and right upper light emitting decoration devices 90 and 105 are disposed in the box-shaped main body 51 of the rear unit 50, the front left and right upper mounting bases 94 and 109 constituting the light emitting decoration device 90 and 105, respectively. Since the face plate portions 95 and 110 are positioned on substantially the same vertical plane as the rear edge of the opening of the illumination window portion 84 (first window portion 84a) provided in the upper wall portion 53a, the front plate The light transmitted through the portions 95 and 110 can be applied to the decorative plate portions 99 and 115 located on the front side of the upper fixing portion 54 (upper step portion 83). Further, the left and right upper decorative covers 93 and 108 constituting the left and right upper light emitting decorative devices 90 and 105 are respectively connected to the front support plate portions 100 and 116 of the decorative covers 93 and 108. Since the illumination notches 100a and 116a that open up and down are respectively opened at positions corresponding to the illumination window 84 (the first window 84a) formed in 53a, the front plate portions 95, The decoration which is located on the front side of the upper fixing part 54 (upper step part 83) is transmitted through the illumination wall part 84 formed continuously with the upper wall part 53a and the upper fixing part 54. The plate portions 99 and 115 can be irradiated.

(Assembly of each lighting decoration device)
Next, the attachment structure of the left and right upper and left and right side light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 with respect to the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50 will be described. The light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 at the left and right upper parts and the left and right side parts are different in specific shape and number of LED boards, mounting bases, etc., but the basic configuration is the same. Therefore, in the following description, the case where the upper left light emitting decoration device 90 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 will be described. In order to attach the upper left light emitting decoration device 90 to the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50, first, the upper left LED substrate 91 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51. Specifically, a positioning protrusion 67 formed in the first upper installation region 62 located at the upper left portion of the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing surface portion 53) is provided with a positioning hole formed in the upper left LED substrate 91. The upper left LED board 91 is positioned in the first upper installation area 62 and screwed through the through hole 91b of the upper left LED board 91 is screwed and the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing The upper left LED substrate 91 is fixed to the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing surface portion 53) by screwing into a screw hole 68 provided corresponding to the first upper installation region 62 of the surface portion 53). Here, a first partition wall 60 defining the first upper installation region 62 is formed on the facing surface portion 52 of the box-shaped main body 51 so as to protrude forward, and a lower edge portion of the upper LED substrate 91. Are aligned with the first partition wall 60, so that when the upper left LED substrate 91 is installed on the opposing surface portion 52 of the box-shaped main body 51, the upper left LED substrate 91 is moved by the first partition wall 60. The position is restricted, and it can be placed at a predetermined position.

  In a state where the upper left LED substrate 91 is fixed to the facing surface portion 52 of the box-shaped main body 51, the upper left decorative cover 93 is attached so as to cover the front side of the upper left LED substrate 91. At this time, each rear mounting boss 96 formed on the upper left mounting base 94 of the upper left decorative cover 93 is fitted into the corresponding fitting notch 91c provided on the upper left LED board 91, and the upper left The engagement hook 97a formed on the part mounting base 94 engages with the engagement hole 85 formed in the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), and the upper left decorative cover 93 is positioned. In this state, the screw inserted through the through hole 69 of the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing surface portion 52) facing the fitting notch 91c of the upper left LED board 91 is inserted into the screw hole 96a of each rear mounting boss 96. By screwing, the upper left upper decorative cover 93 is fixed in a state of covering the front side of the upper left LED substrate 91, and the upper left light emitting decoration is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 (first upper installation region 62) of the rear unit 50. A device 90 is attached. As described above, each rear mounting boss 96 formed on the upper left mounting base 94 of the upper left decorative cover 93 is fitted to the corresponding fitting notch 91c provided on the upper left LED board 91. Thus, the upper left decorative cover 93 can be accurately positioned at a predetermined position (first upper installation region 62) of the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50.

  That is, each of the upper left LED board 91 and the upper left decorative cover 93 can be accurately positioned and fixed with respect to the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing surface portion 52) of the rear unit 50. The partial light emitting decoration device 90 can be positioned and fixed at an accurate position with respect to the box-shaped main body 51 (opposing surface portion 52) of the back unit 50, and the transparent upper panel 31 (game board 30) is provided by the upper left light emitting decoration device 90. It is possible to accurately decorate the predetermined position. Further, in the left and right side light emitting decoration devices 120 and 145, the left and right side decoration covers 127 and 152 are formed on the side surfaces of the left and right side mounting bases 128 and 153 on the opposing surface portion 52 of the box-shaped main body 51. Since the second partition wall 61 partitioning the left side installation area 65 and the right side installation area 66 is in contact with the left and right side decorative covers 127, 152 (left and right side mounting bases 128, 153) can be more accurately positioned with respect to a predetermined position (the left side installation area 65 and the right side installation area 66) of the box-shaped main body 51 of the back unit 50. In addition, the second partition wall 61 corresponding to the side portions of the left and right side mounting bases 128 and 153 of the left and right side decorative covers 127 and 152 makes contact with the shutter device 500 and the left and right side light emission. An effect of preventing contact with the decoration devices 120 and 145 can also be expected.

  Further, the left upper mounting base 94 and the left upper cover main body 98 constituting the left upper decorative cover 93 are arranged so that the positioning protrusions 102 formed on the left upper cover main body 98 are connected to the left upper mounting base 94 (front plate). The upper left cover body 98 is positioned with respect to the upper left mounting base 94 by being inserted into a corresponding positioning hole 95a formed in the portion 95). In this state, the screw inserted into the through hole of the upper left mounting base 94 (front plate portion 95) is screwed into the screw hole 101a of the front mounting boss 101 formed in the upper left cover body 98. The left upper mounting base 94 and the left upper cover main body 98 are fixed, so that the left upper decorative cover 93 can be handled as a single unit body. Thus, the left upper mounting base 94 and the left upper cover main body 98 are accurately positioned using the positioning hole 95a formed in the left upper mounting base 94 and the positioning protrusion 102 provided in the left upper cover main body 98. By fixing both members 94 and 98 in a state, the decorative plate portion 99 of the left upper cover main body 98 is in a predetermined positional relationship with respect to the left upper mount 94 (the upper left mount 94 in the decorative plate 99). Can be positioned and fixed accurately and easily at a position where the front plate portion 95 is covered. Then, the left upper decorative cover 93 can be handled as a single unit body, so that the left upper decorative cover 93 is attached to the box-shaped main body 51 (first upper installation region 62) of the back unit 50 as described above. By accurately positioning and fixing, the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left decorative cover 93 can be accurately positioned at a position covering the front side of the upper left LED substrate 91.

(About lighting of the game board by the side light emitting effect device)
The left and right side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 are disposed in front of the left and right upper and left and right side light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145, and the left and right side side light emitting effects are provided. The left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 in the devices 170 and 177 cover the front surfaces of the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, and 162 of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145, respectively. Here, in a state where the LEDs 197 of the left and right illumination means 172 and 179 in the right and left side light emitting effect devices 170 and 177 are not emitting light, the symbols formed on the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are the transparent It is hardly visible from the front side through the plate 31, and the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, 162 of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145 on the left and right upper parts and the left and right side parts through the transparent panels 171, 178. Can be viewed from the front side.

  When the LEDs 197 of the left and right illumination means 172 and 179 emit light under the control of the control device 700, the light from the LED 197 is transmitted to the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 corresponding to the illumination means 172 and 179, respectively. Irradiated toward the side end face, is introduced into the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 from the side turning surface, and the light is reflected by the pattern drawn on the transparent panels 171 and 178, so that the pattern is displayed to be raised. And visible from the front side. That is, since the player is displayed with unexpected symbols on the front side of the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 on the left and right upper and left and right sides, an unexpected light emission effect can be performed. Yes, it can improve interest. That is, according to whether the LEDs 197 of the left and right illumination means 172 and 179 are turned on and off, the symbols formed on the left and right shielding members 173 and 180 are changed to the light emitting decoration devices 90 and 105 on the left and right upper and left and right sides. , 120, 145 can be displayed over the symbols displayed on the decorative covers 93, 108, 127, 152, so that a variety of game effects can be achieved, and the interest of the game is improved. The symbols of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are visible from the front side only when the light from the LEDs 197 of the left and right illumination means 172 and 179 is introduced from the corresponding end surfaces of the panels 171 and 178. In the state where light is not introduced from the end face, the symbols provided on the left and right shielding members 173, 180 are displayed on the decorative covers 93, 108, 127, 152 of the respective light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, 145. It does not hinder the visibility of the design.

  In particular, in the embodiment, each of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 is separated from the back surface of the transparent plate 31 by the thickness of the fixed walls 187 and 191 in the left and right illumination means 172 and 179. 171 and 178 are located close to the position where they almost come into contact with the back surface of the transparent plate 31, and the light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145 provided with minute uneven patterns on the back side of the transparent panels 171 and 178 are provided. Since the decorative plate portions 99, 115, 137, and 162 are positioned, the symbols formed on the transparent panels 171 and 178 are viewed from the front side when the LEDs 197 of the left and right illumination units 172 and 179 are not emitting light. It becomes almost invisible, and the unexpectedness when the symbols are displayed on the transparent panels 171 and 178 can be enhanced, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved. Further, the matching position when the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are combined is a position where the decorative plate portion 99 of the upper left light emitting decoration device 90 and the decorative plate portion 115 of the upper right light emitting decoration device 105 are aligned. By configuring the positions so as to match the front and rear, it is difficult to determine the matching portions of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178, and the appearance of the game board 30 is not impaired.

  In addition, the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 in the embodiment cover the entire front opening of the box-shaped main body 51 in the back unit 50 in a state where both the panels 171 and 178 are combined, and The left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are positioned in the entire region that is visible from the front side through the transparent plate 31 so as to define an opening region that is substantially aligned with the through hole 30a. Regardless of the position on the game board 30 where the player's attention is directed, the design in which the design suddenly emerges is not overlooked.

  The left transparent panel 171 is covered with upper and lower peripheral wall surfaces 53a and 53b of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51) and at the left of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). The left peripheral end surface is covered by the drawing wall portion 53c, and the right lower end surface is covered by the left side surfaces of the first and second partition walls 76 and 77 formed in the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). Furthermore, the end face of the transparent plate 31 on the side of the through hole 31a in the left transparent panel 171 is covered with the frame-shaped decorative body 200. Similarly, the right transparent panel 178 has upper and lower peripheral end surfaces covered by upper and lower image wall portions 53a and 53b of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51), and the right side of the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). The right peripheral end surface is covered with the drawing wall portion 53d, and the lower left end surface is covered with the right side surfaces of the first and second partition walls 76 and 77 formed in the back unit 50 (box-shaped main body 51). Furthermore, the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is covered and opposed to the end surface of the transparent plate 31 on the side of the through-hole 31a in the right transparent panel 178. Accordingly, the left and right upper and left and right side light emitting decoration devices 90, 105, 120, and 145, the central light emitting decoration device 167, and the upper light emitting effect device 302 are arranged around the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178. Direct or indirect light can be suitably prevented from being introduced from the outer peripheral end surfaces of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 to lift the design.

  The members and structures covering the outer peripheral end surfaces of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 that are not covered by the left and right shielding members 173 and 180 are both for shielding the outer peripheral end surfaces of the transparent panels 171 and 178. Since it is not a dedicated component and is a necessary component / configuration constituting the game board 30, the cost does not increase. The left and right illumination means 172 and 178 include shielding walls 189 and 193 that overlap the front side of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178, and irradiate light to the end surfaces of the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178. Since the front side of the LED 197 is configured to be shielded, the light of the LED 197 can be prevented from being directly irradiated from the transparent plate 31 to the front side.

  The right illumination means 179 includes a second right panel LED substrate 184 that emits light toward a portion of the right transparent panel 178 that overlaps with the upper fixing portion 54 of the back unit 50. The LED 197 of the second right panel LED substrate 184 faces the inclined end surface of the right transparent panel 178. Accordingly, when the LED 197 of the second right panel LED substrate 184 emits light, the light introduced from the inclined end surface of the right transparent panel 178 is formed in a portion overlapping the upper fixing portion 54 in the panel 178. You can brighten the pattern. That is, even if it is the upper position (upper fixed portion 54) of the game board 30 where the front and rear dimensions cannot be ensured because it overlaps with the ball tank 26 provided in the middle frame 12, the symbols are displayed so as to be raised. This makes it possible to improve the overall decoration and performance of the game board 30.

  In addition, the frame-shaped decorative body 200 disposed in the through hole 31a of the transparent plate 31 has the upper outer peripheral wall 225 protruding rearward of the transparent plate 31 through the through holes 31a in the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178. It faces the side end face of the side. For this reason, when the LED 197 of the left panel LED board 174 in the left illumination means 172 emits light, the light transmitted to the right end surface of the left transparent panel 171 passes through the upper outer peripheral wall 225 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. The light transmitted to the left end face of the right transparent panel 178 when the LED 197 of the first right panel LED board 182 in the right illumination means 179 emits light is emitted to the first inner peripheral wall 230. Since the first inner peripheral wall 230 is irradiated through the upper outer peripheral wall 225 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 and the first inner peripheral wall 230 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is brightened, the decorative property of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is improved. Improves the fun of gaming.

  In particular, the first inner peripheral wall 230 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 defines a window 200a that the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 faces, so that the first frame-shaped decorative body 200 has a first view of the player. Since the inner peripheral wall 230 is easy to enter, the decorativeness can be effectively improved by brightening the first inner peripheral wall 230. In addition, when the first inner peripheral wall 230 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is brightened, the symbols formed on the left and right transparent panels 171 and 178 are displayed so as to be raised. Is further improved.

  The left and right illumination means 172 and 179 for illuminating the first inner peripheral wall 230 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 are disposed on the back unit 50, and independent illumination means for illuminating the first inner peripheral wall 230. Since there is no need to provide the frame-shaped decorative body 200, the window 200a of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 does not become small. In the embodiment, the left panel LED substrate 174 for illuminating the first inner peripheral wall 230 is connected to the left end side of the box-shaped main body 51 (the left image wall portion 53c and the upper left and left side light emitting decoration devices 90, The first right panel LED board 182 is disposed on the right end side of the box-shaped main body 51 (the right wall portion 53d, the upper right portion, and the right portion). The window 200a of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 can be enlarged and the large-sized symbol display device 19 is adopted by being disposed in the second substrate housing space 87 provided between the light emitting decoration devices 105 and 145). be able to.

(About the top lighting effect device)
When assembling the upper light emitting effect device 302, first, the front light emitting LED substrate 341 is accommodated in the fitting accommodating portion 334 of the disk-shaped base member 328. At this time, the front light emitting LED substrate 341 is accommodated in a state where the outer peripheral edge of the substrate 341 substantially matches the inner peripheral edge of the fitting accommodating portion 334. The first relay line connector receiving portions 341c and 341c and the connection line connector receiving portion 341d provided on the rear surface of the front light emitting LED board 341 are connected to the base via the connector openings 339 provided in the base substrate 332, respectively. It faces the rear surface of the substrate 332. Next, the rear part of the side light emitting LED board 343 is accommodated in each light source holding part 340, and the second relay line connector receiving part 343a of the side light emitting LED board 343 is made to face the connector opening part 339.

  Further, the light passage member 329 is fitted into the disk-shaped base member 328 from the front side, and the light passage member 329 is accommodated in the fitting accommodation portion 334. At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the circular wall portion 355 of the light passage member 329 substantially coincides with the inner peripheral surface of the storage wall portion 333, so that the light transmission member 329 is substantially aligned with the fitting storage portion 334. Is inserted. Further, the rear end edge of the circular wall portion 355 of the light passage member 329 abuts on the outer edge portion of the front light emitting LED substrate 341 housed in the fitting housing portion 334, and the front light emitting LED substrate 341 is the disc-shaped base member 328. And the light passage member 329. That is, the front light emitting LED board 341 is firmly held in the fitting housing portion 334, and the character LED 342 can be installed at an appropriate position. Further, the wall surface concave portions 355b of the light passage member 329 do not interfere with the light source holding portion 340 and the side light emitting LED substrate 343 when the light passage member 329 is housed in the fitting housing portion 334. Further, when the light passage member 329 is fitted into the fitting housing portion 334, the light guide wall 359 of each housing hole portion 357 faces the front side of the front light emitting LED board 341, and the housing hole portion 357 is for the corresponding character. The LED 342 is accommodated so as to be enclosed from the front side (see FIGS. 45 and 41).

  When the light passage member 329 is fitted into the fitting housing portion 334, the light source housing portion 356 houses the corresponding side light emitting LED substrate 343 from the front side, and the substrate 343 serves as the light source holding portion 340 and the light source housing portion. 356. Accordingly, the side-emitting LED substrate 343 is securely held in an appropriate arrangement posture, and the panel LED 344 provided on the substrate 343 is oriented in an appropriate direction. Further, each panel LED 344 faces the light passage hole 362 provided in the holding wall 360, and is directed to the housing recess 361 through the light passage hole 362 (see FIG. 41). That is, each panel LED 344 has its irradiation direction defined by the side light emitting LED substrate 343 sandwiched between the light source holding part 340 and the light source accommodating part 356, and the upper and lower panel LEDs 344 and 344 are opposed to each other. Then, light is irradiated in a cross shape.

  Next, the light reflecting sheet 363 is accommodated in the accommodating recess 361 of the light passage member 329, and the circular transparent panel 326 is fitted into the accommodating recess 361 from the front side of the sheet 363. The circular transparent panel 326 has an outer shape that matches the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the holding wall portion 360 that defines the housing recess 361, and the side end surface of the circular transparent panel 326 is substantially aligned with the inner peripheral surface of the holding wall portion 360. To do. Therefore, the circular transparent panel 326 can be firmly held in the housing recess 361 and the circular transparent panel 326 can be prevented from rattling. The panel LED 344 faces the side end face of the circular transparent panel 326 through the light passage hole 362 with respect to the circular transparent panel 326 accommodated in the accommodating recess 361. Thereby, the light of panel LED 344 is reliably irradiated to the circular transparent panel 326. That is, since the light of each panel LED 344 is irradiated from the appropriate direction to the circular transparent panel 326 stably housed in the housing recess 361, the light is accurately reflected forward by the circular transparent panel 326. be able to. Moreover, since the light is simultaneously irradiated by the four panel LEDs 344, 344, 344, and 344 that are opposed to the top, bottom, left, and right, the circular transparent panel 326 is irradiated with light in a well-balanced manner, and a light circle pattern without shadows is formed. It can be reflected forward. As shown in FIG. 46, the front end surface of the circular transparent panel 326 accommodated in the accommodation recess 361 substantially coincides with the front end edge of the holding wall portion 360.

  Next, the production cover member 327 is assembled so as to cover the disc-shaped base member 328 from the front side. That is, each positioning fixing boss 366a provided on the rear surface of the outer edge decoration portion 366 is assembled rearward along the corresponding guide recess 338 of the disk-shaped base member 328, and the rear end of the fixing boss 366a is connected to the outer boss receiving portion. 337 is fitted. Then, the effect cover member 327 is attached to the disk-shaped base member 328 by screwing the positioning fixing boss 366 a to the outer boss receiving portion 337. Here, the outer boss receiving portions 337, 337, 337 are arranged in a non-regular triangle shape on the rear surface of the base substrate 332, and the positioning fixing bosses 366a, 366a, 366a of the outer edge decoration portion 366 are also outer boss receiving. Corresponding to the portions 337, 337, 337, they are arranged in a non-regular triangle shape. Therefore, the effect cover member 327 can always be installed in an appropriate manner with respect to the disc-shaped base member 328. Further, since the fixed boss 366a is screwed in a state where the side surface of each positioning fixed boss 366a of the outer edge decoration portion 366 faces the corresponding guide recess 338, the effect cover member 327 is securely attached to the disc-shaped base member 328. It is done. Since the positioning fixing boss 366a of the outer edge decoration portion 366 and the outer boss receiving portion 337 of the disc-shaped base member 328 are provided outside each member, the space between the effect cover member 327 and the disc-shaped base member 328 is effectively used. Can be used. Since the positioning fixing boss 366a is provided on the rear surface of the outer edge decoration portion 366, the fixing boss 366a is not visually recognized from the front side. Further, since the front side of the outer boss receiving portion 337 of the disk-shaped base member 328 is covered with the outer edge decoration portion 366, the boss receiving portion 337 is also difficult to be visually recognized from the front side.

  Here, when the effect cover member 327 is attached to the disk-shaped base member 328, as shown in FIG. 41, the rear end edge of the annular contact rib 367 contacts the front end edge of the housing wall 333, The cover member 327 is stably attached to the disk-shaped base member 328. In addition, when the production cover member 327 is assembled to the disk-shaped base member 328, each abutment presser of the production cover member 327 is placed on the front end surface of the circular transparent panel 326 and the front edge of the holding wall 360 that are aligned on the same surface. Since the portion 368 abuts from the front side, the circular transparent panel 326 is sandwiched between the effect cover member 327 and the light passage member 329 together with the light reflecting sheet 363 (see FIG. 46). Therefore, the transparent panel 326 can be securely held in the housing recess 361, and the transparent panel 326 can be prevented from rattling or misalignment. In addition, since the holding wall portion 360 of the light passage member 329 is pressed by the abutment pressing portion 368, the light passage member 329 is stably held in the fitting housing portion 334 of the disk-shaped base member 328.

  As described above, the upper light-emitting effect device 302 is configured to further fit and accommodate the circular transparent panel 326 in the housing recess 361 of the light passage member 329 fitted in the base member 328, so that each member is moved in the front-rear direction. The front and rear dimensions of the upper light emission effect device 302 can be reduced. Further, since the front light emitting LED board 341 and the circular transparent panel 326 are assembled without being screwed, the number of assembling steps can be reduced and the cost can be reduced, and no additional fixing member or the like is required. Further, since the receiving hole portion 357 of the light passing member 329 is configured by the light passing hole 358 and the light guide wall 359, the light passing member is compared with the case where the holding hole portion 357 is formed by making the holding substrate 345 thick. 329 can be reduced in weight.

  Here, a connector insertion portion 302d of the relay wire 302c is connected to the first relay wire connector receiving portion 341c and the second relay wire connector receiving portion 343a protruding from the rear surface of the base substrate 332, and The relay wire 302c is wound around the base fixing bosses 335, 335, and 335 of the base substrate 332 and collected. Similarly, the connector insertion portion 302b of the connecting wire 302a is connected to the connecting wire connector receiving portion 341d facing the back of the base substrate 332, and the connecting wire 302a is wound around the base fixing boss 335 at the center lower portion and gathered. .

  Next, the upper light emitting effect device 302 is attached to the attachment base 301. That is, each base fixing boss 335 of the base substrate 332 is fitted into the corresponding boss receiving hole 321a of the effect device fixing unit 320, and the upper light emitting effect device 302 is screwed to the effect device fixing unit 320. At this time, as shown in FIG. 41, the rear surface of the base substrate 332 is separated from the installation surface 321 of the rendering device fixing portion 320 by the protruding length of the base fixing boss 335, and the rear surface and the installation surface of the base substrate 332 are separated. A wiring space 336 is defined between the wirings 321 and 321. The relay space 302c and the connecting wire 302a wound around the base fixing bosses 335, 335, 335 can be accommodated in the wiring space 336. Therefore, when the upper light emitting effect device 302 is fixed to the mounting base 301, the relay line 302c and the connecting line 302a do not get in the way and the installation work becomes efficient. Moreover, since the relay line 302c and the connecting line 302a are held in a state of being wound around the base fixing bosses 335, 335, and 335, the wirings 302c and 302a are frayed and exposed from the side of the upper light emitting effect device 302. And it can prevent that the presentation unit 201 looks bad.

  Since the installation surface 321 of the effect device fixing portion 320 is inclined, the upper light emitting effect device 302 (disc-shaped base member 328) attached to the effect device fixing portion 320 is oriented obliquely downward. Mounted on. That is, the rear surface of the disk-shaped base member 328 is inclined backward. Further, the base fixing bosses 335, 335, 335 are disposed so as to be biased to the upper side of the rear surface of the disk-shaped base member 328, and the effect device fixing portion 320 has an attachment base 301 (an intermediate cover body 319). It is biased and provided on the lower side. Therefore, when the upper light-emitting effect device 302 is attached to the effect device fixing portion 320, the lower side of the disc-shaped base member 328 protrudes downward from the attachment base 301. Accordingly, the upper light emitting effect device 302 is in a state in which the substantially lower half of the rear surface of the base substrate 332 faces the rear of the mounting base 301 (see FIGS. 38 and 41), and the connecting line 302a can be easily moved to the rear of the mounting base 301. Can be pulled out. Then, the connecting wire 302 a drawn out to the rear of the mounting base 301 is connected from below to the large connector receiving portion 313 of the effect unit relay board 311 provided on the rear surface of the mounting base 301. That is, since the connecting line 302a is routed behind the upper light emitting effect device 302, the connecting light line 302a cannot be viewed from the front side, and the appearance of the upper light emitting effect device 302 can be improved.

  Next, the movable effect devices 303 and 303 are attached to the left and right case body attachment recesses 307 and 307 of the attachment base 301, and the effect unit 201 is completed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 36, the movable effect device 303 attached to the attachment base 301 is in a state where the rear portion of the box-shaped case body 370 protrudes rearward from the attachment base 301. Then, the wiring 303a led out from each movable effect device 303 is routed sideways along the rear surface of the base body 304, and the connector insertion portion 303b of the wiring 303a is connected to the corresponding connector receiving portion (left connector) of the effect unit relay board 311. To the receiving portion 314 or the right connector receiving portion 315). That is, since the wiring 303a of each movable effect device 303 is routed behind the base body 304 and connected to the effect unit relay board 311, the wire 303a is not visually recognized from the front side, and the effect unit 201 Can look good.

(About frame-shaped ornaments)
Next, the case where the members of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 are assembled will be described. For the lower frame body 203, first, the lower frame decoration cover 242 is attached to the lower frame base member 243. At this time, as shown in FIG. 26, both cover engaging pieces 249 and 249 of the central cover portion 247 are engaged with the lower edge portions of the rear surface of the left cover portion 246 and the right cover portion 248, respectively. Further, the engagement pieces 249 and 249 of the left cover part 246 and the right cover part 248 engage with the upper edge of the rear surface of the center cover part 247, respectively. That is, the entire left frame decorative cover 242 is firmly connected to the left cover portion 246 and the right cover portion 248 by the cover engagement pieces 249 and 249 engaging with the center cover portion 247, respectively. Therefore, when the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is attached to the transparent plate 31, the ball outlet 250 of the central cover portion 247 is surely opened at an appropriate position of the transparent plate 31 (just above the upper start winning prize opening 40a). .

  Next, the stage forming member 244 is slid forward to the stage mounting portion 262 of the lower frame base member 243, and the stage forming member 244 is assembled to the lower frame base member 243. At this time, the outer guide pieces 279 and 279 of the stage forming member 244 are guided along both guide notches 261 and 261 of the lower frame base member 243, and the stage forming member 244 smoothly moves to the lower frame base member 243. It is assembled. Next, the wall member 245 is assembled from behind the stage forming member 244. That is, as shown in FIG. 25, the positioning bosses 273 and 273 of the stage forming member 244 are inserted into the positioning holes 245b and 245b of the wall member 245, and the wall member 245 is assembled to the stage forming member 244.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 28, the rear horizontal passage 283 of the wall member 245 communicates with the front horizontal passage 259, and an L-shaped passage 291 is formed together with the vertical passage 289 of the wall member 245. Moreover, the wall member 245 is positioned by fitting the fixed bosses 272c and 272c of the stage flange portion 272 to the boss receiving portions 245a and 245a provided on both sides of the vertical passage 289 and the rear horizontal passage 283, and the wall member. The positioning bosses 273 and 273 of the stage forming member 244 are inserted into the positioning holes 245b and 245b of the H.245 and positioned. Therefore, a reliable communication relationship between the rear horizontal passage 283 (vertical passage 289) and the front horizontal passage 259 is achieved, and the pachinko ball can be accurately guided to the ball outlet 250 by the L-shaped passage 291.

  Thus, the lower frame body 203 is completed by assembling the lower frame decorative cover 242, the lower frame base member 243, the stage forming member 244, and the wall member 245. When assembling the lower frame body 203 to the upper frame body 202, first, the left and right fixing pieces 263, 263 provided on the lower frame base member 243 are attached to the lower frame mounting surfaces 222, 222 of the rear frame member 205. Let it come. That is, the mounting protrusion 223 of the rear frame member 205 is inserted into the fixed cylindrical portion 264 of the fixed piece 263 so that the fixed piece 263 contacts the lower frame mounting surface 222. At this time, each contact piece 267 of the lower frame base member 243 is guided to the inner surface of the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219, and the corresponding contact piece 267 is in contact with the inner surface of the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219. It becomes. The upper edge of the contact piece 267 faces the lower frame locking piece 221 of the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219, and the lower edge of the flange-shaped outer peripheral wall 219 is engaged with the engagement protrusion 268 of the fixed piece 263. The fixing piece 263 is properly positioned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 29, the passage mounting piece 296 of the ball passage portion 274 faces the fixing concave portion 265 of the fixing piece 263, and the fixing through hole 297 of the ball passage portion 274 is provided in the fixing piece 263. Aligned with the recessed portion insertion hole 266. In this state, as shown in FIG. 30, the passage fixing boss 234 of the front frame member 206 is inserted into the fixing through hole 297 and the concave portion insertion hole 266, and the passage fixing boss 234 is aligned with the spherical passage fixing hole 224. Let Then, by screwing the passage fixing boss 234 through these through holes 297, 266, and 224, the rear frame member 205 and the front frame member 206 are assembled to form the upper frame body 202, and the upper frame body 202 is formed. The frame body 202 and the lower frame body 203 are assembled together with the ball passage portion 274, and the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is completed. As described above, the upper frame body 202 and the lower frame body 203 are assembled, and the frame-shaped decorative body 200 can be handled as one unit with the ball passage portion 274 provided. Attachment to 31 becomes easy.

  Further, since the upper frame body 202 and the lower frame body 203 are assembled with the left and right fixing pieces 263 and 263 sandwiched therebetween, the connection strength between them can be improved. Moreover, the ball passage portions 274 and 274 can be attached at the same time as the upper frame body 202 and the lower frame body 203 are assembled, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved. In addition, since the ball passage portion 274 is attached with the passage attachment piece 296 sandwiched between the fixed piece 263 and the front frame member 206, the ball passage portion 274 can be easily and firmly assembled.

  Here, when the front frame member 206 is assembled to the rear frame member 205, the rear surface of the decorative flange portion 235 comes into contact with the front ends of the protruding pieces 211, 211 of the side flange portion 210, and the ball passing gate 236. Is defined. Then, the ball detection sensor 213 is inserted through the sensor attachment port 212 from the rear, and the front end surface of the ball detection sensor 213 is brought into contact with the sensor support surface 237. Then, the hook portion 216 provided on the rear frame member 205 is engaged with the rear portion of the ball detection sensor 213, and the ball detection sensor 213 is attached to the sensor attachment port 212 (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, when the front frame member 206 and the rear frame member 205 are assembled, the second wiring passage 241 is defined by the central inner peripheral wall 240 of the front frame member 206 and the upper outer peripheral wall 225 of the rear frame member 205. Then, the wire 213a of the ball detection sensor 213 attached to the sensor attachment port 212 is inserted into the first wiring passage 231 through the wiring communication passage 218 of the rear frame member 205 as shown in FIG. Further, the second wiring passage 241 is inserted from the first wiring passage 231 to guide the wiring 213a of the ball detection sensor 213 to a substantially upper central position of the upper frame body 202, and the first outlet notch 227 (wiring passage outlet) 323) to the rear of the transparent plate 31. As described above, since the first and second wiring passages 231 and 241 for inserting the wiring 213a of the sphere detection sensor 213 are provided in the frame-shaped decorative body 200, the wiring 213a is connected to the frame-shaped decorative body 200 and other peripheral members. It can be efficiently routed without being caught and pulled out behind the transparent plate 31. Moreover, since the front of the first wiring passage 231 and the second wiring passage 241 is covered with the front frame decoration portion 233 and the upper frame decoration cover 207, the wiring 213a inserted through both the arrangement passages 231 and 241 is on the player side. The frame-shaped decorative body 200 can be improved in appearance. In addition, since the second wiring passage 241 is defined by assembling the rear frame member 205 and the front frame member 206, there is no need to separately provide members constituting the second wiring passage 241 in the frame-shaped decorative body 200. Cost can be reduced.

  Next, the effect unit 201 is attached to the upper part of the frame-shaped decorative body 200. That is, the projecting mounting portion 322 of the middle cover body 319 faces the mounting recess 226 of the rear frame member 205, and the upper decorative cover 305 is screwed to the rear frame member 205, whereby the effect unit 201 is frame-shaped decorative. Attached to the body 200. The effect unit 201 attached to the frame-shaped decorative body 200 faces the window 200a of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 and becomes visible from the front side. Then, the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is attached to the through hole 31 a of the transparent plate 31 with the effect unit 201 attached. Thus, by providing the effect unit 201 in the frame-shaped decorative body 200, the periphery of the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 can be more effectively decorated, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Here, when the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is assembled to the transparent plate 31, the passage forming portion 288 of the wall member 245 faces the second positioning recess 605 of the decorative member 597 attached to the shutter device 500. The wall member 245 is positioned by the decorative member 597. In addition, the rear ends of the positioning bosses 273 and 273 of the stage forming member 244 protrude from the positioning holes 245b and 245b of the wall member 245 and are inserted into the positioning insertion holes 606 and 606 provided in the decorative member 597 ( (See FIG. 25). That is, the wall member 245 is positioned from behind by the decorative member 597, and the vertical passage 289 (rear horizontal passage 283) and the front horizontal passage 259 are more reliably communicated. Moreover, since the wall member 245 and the decorative member 597 are positioned via the positioning bosses 273 and 273 of the stage forming member 244, the assembling work can be facilitated and the proper positional relationship between them can be maintained. In addition, by using the common positioning bosses 273 and 273, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

(About the lighting effect of the upper lighting effect device)
Next, the light emission effect of the upper light emission effect device 302 will be described. First, when each panel LED 344 emits light by the control device 700, the light of each panel LED 344 is irradiated to the side end surface of the circular transparent panel 326 from four directions through the light passage hole 362. Then, the light incident from the side end surface of the circular transparent panel 326 is reflected by minute unevenness provided on the rear surface of the panel 326, and a light circle (design) as a whole is irradiated forward. Further, a part of the light of the panel LED 344 (light transmitted through the circular transparent panel 326 or light reflected backward by the panel 326) is reflected by the light reflecting sheet 363, and a light circle of light irradiates forward. Is done. This light circle is transmitted through the cover front surface 365 of the effect cover member 327, so that a light circle of light is projected on the cover front surface 365 as shown in FIG. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the controller 700 causes the character LEDs 342 to emit light all at once, the light of the LEDs 342 is irradiated forward. At this time, the housing hole 357 is configured so that the opening front end edge 358a of the light passage hole 358 is positioned in front of the character LED 342, and the character LED 342 is surrounded from the front side by the housing hole 357 (light guide wall 359). Contained. Therefore, the light of the character LED 342 is guided by the light guide wall 359 of the accommodation hole 357, and the light of the character LED 342 passes through the light guide wall 359, so that the light of the accommodation hole 357 (the light passage hole 358). The light has a shape along the contour of the opening (that is, the letter “heaven”). Thereby, it is possible to project the light “heaven” characters on the cover front surface 365 of the effect cover member 327 so as to emerge. In addition, by accommodating the character LED 342 in the accommodation hole portion 357, it is possible to prevent other light from entering the accommodation hole portion 357, and to project clear light characters on the cover front surface 365. Moreover, since the receiving holes 357 are provided corresponding to each stroke of the character “heaven”, even a complicated pattern such as a character “heaven” in a plurality of images is clearly projected on the front surface 365 of the cover. Can be made. Furthermore, since the character LED 342 is not provided at the intersecting portion of the accommodation hole portion 357, the intersecting portion of the “heaven” character is not projected gently, and the character of “heaven” is drawn one by one. It can be projected clearly. Furthermore, since the inner side surface of the accommodation hole 357 (light guide wall 359) is subjected to light reflection processing, the light passing through the accommodation hole 357 is not attenuated, and the ceiling surface 365 is "Can be projected clearly.

  In addition, when the control device 700 performs light emission control for each character LED 342 housed in each housing hole portion 357, it is possible to project “heaven” characters on the cover front surface 365 for each stroke. Therefore, for example, it is possible to produce an exciting light emission effect in which the characters “heaven” are projected one by one along the writing order. Also in this case, since the accommodation hole portion 357 accommodates the character LED 342 from the front side, the accommodation hole portion 357 that accommodates the character LED 342 that does not emit light is accommodated in the other accommodation hole portion 357 and emits light. Intrusion of the light from the character LED 342 is suppressed. Furthermore, if the panel LED 344 and the character LED 342 are caused to emit light at the same time, as shown in FIG. 45, the character of “heaven” can be projected in a light circle of light projected on the front surface 365 of the cover. A rich lighting effect is possible.

  As described above, according to the upper light emission effect device 302 according to the embodiment, various patterns (light light circle and “heaven” character) can be projected on the cover front surface 365, and an interesting light emission effect is performed. obtain. In addition, since the circular transparent panel 326 of the embodiment is configured to reflect light by the panel 326 by the unevenness provided on the entire rear surface, the circular light that is the shape of the panel 326 can be reflected. In addition, by forming the effect cover member 327 with a half mirror, the interior covered with the cover member 327 can be made invisible, and the aesthetics of the upper light emission effect device 302 can be improved. In addition, since the cover front surface 365 is matted, it is difficult for the player's face and the like to be reflected on the front surface 365, and the player can concentrate on the game. Further, the design projected on the cover front surface 365 by the mat becomes clear, and a clear design can be displayed by light emission.

(About opening and closing the shutter member)
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the shutter device 500 disposed in the back unit 50 shields the entire display space 501 with the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 both facing the shielding position. It shall be. In the shutter device 500, the left and right drive motors 561 and 563 are rotated in the forward and reverse directions in accordance with the symbol variation game executed on the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19, and a required operation effect is performed. That is, when the left and right drive motors 561 and 563 rotate the corresponding left and right operation members 560 and 562 so as to swing in the opening direction, the left operation is performed under the meshing action of each of the drive gears 576 and the corresponding driven gear 565. The member 560 swings leftward with the pivot 564 as a fulcrum, and the right actuating member 562 swings rightward with the pivot 564 as a fulcrum. The corresponding left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are moved toward the open position by the swinging of the left and right actuating members 560 and 562. As described above, since the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are bilaterally symmetric, the operation of the left shutter member 532 and the left operating means 558 for operating the left shutter member 532 will be mainly described. The operation of the shutter member 533 and the right operation means 559 for operating the right shutter member 533 will be described together.

  That is, as the left actuating member 560 swings to the left, the rear left shielding plate 536 connected to the left actuating member 560 moves to the left along the rear upper and lower rail grooves 515 and 524. As a result, the central portion of the display space 501 in the left-right direction is opened. When the lower front closing engagement piece 542 in the rear left shielding plate 536 is engaged with the lower back opening engagement piece 545 in the middle left shielding plate 535 from the right side, the state overlaps with the front side of the rear left shielding plate 536. The middle left shielding plate 535 is moved to the left along the middle upper and lower rail grooves 514 and 523, and the open area of the display space 501 is expanded. Further, the lower front closing engagement piece 542 of the middle left shielding plate 535 moving in a state of being overlapped in front of the rear left shielding plate 536 is engaged with the lower back opening engagement piece 545 of the front left shielding plate 534 from the right side. Then, the front left shielding plate 534 in a state of overlapping the front side of the middle left shielding plate 535 is moved to the left along the front upper and lower rail grooves 513 and 522, and the open area of the display space 501 is further expanded.

  When the detection piece 546 of the rear left shielding plate 536 is detected by the corresponding left detection means 547, the left drive motor 561 is stopped and the three left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 of the left shutter member 532 are stopped. Are stopped at the open position stored in the storage space of the left shutter storage member 507 in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction (see FIGS. 52 and 66). The left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 moved to the storage space of the left shutter storage member 507 are supported by being in contact with the buffer members 531 provided on the side plate 526 of the left shutter storage member 507. The shock when 534, 535, 536 moves to the open position is absorbed and relaxed by the buffer member 531, and it is possible to prevent problems such as damage. Further, in a state where the three left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 face the open position, the left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 are placed on the right from the left edge (the edge on the display space 501 side) of the left shutter housing member 507. And the entire left half of the display space 501 is open (see FIG. 52). Even when the three right shielding plates 537, 538, and 539 of the right shutter member 533 face the open position, the right shielding plates 537, 538, and 539 are connected to the right edge (the display space 501 side) of the right shutter housing member 508. The entire right half of the display space 501 is open. That is, when both the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are in the open position, the display space 501 defined in the base frame 502 is totally opened as shown in FIG. Further, as described above, since the display space 501 is set to a size and shape that substantially match the opening 52a of the back unit 50, when the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are moved to the open position, the back unit 50, the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 facing the back side of the opening 52a can be opened as a whole, and the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 do not interfere with the effect performed on the display surface 19a. .

  When the left actuating member 560 linked to the rear left shielding plate 536 facing the open position swings to the right with the pivot 564 as a fulcrum by the rotation of the left drive motor 561, the rear left shielding plate 536 Moves to the right from the storage space of the left shutter storage member 507 along the rear upper and lower rail grooves 515 and 524, and the display space 501 is gradually shielded from the left side. Thereafter, when the upper and lower front closing engagement pieces 541 and 542 in the left shielding plate 536 are engaged with the upper and lower rear closing engagement pieces 543 and 544 in the middle left shielding plate 535 in the open position from the left side, the rear left shielding plate. With the movement of 536, the middle left shielding plate 535 also moves to the right along the upper and lower rail grooves 514 and 523 in a state of being connected to the left side of the left shielding plate 536, and the display space 501 is in the middle left shielding. The plate 535 is gradually shielded. Further, when the upper and lower front closing engagement pieces 541 and 542 in the middle left shielding plate 535 engage with the upper and lower rear closing engagement pieces 543 and 544 in the front left shielding plate 534 from the left side, the middle left shielding plate 535 With the movement, the front left shielding plate 534 moves to the right along the upper and lower rail grooves 513 and 522 while being connected to the left side of the middle left shielding plate 535, and the display space 501 is the front left shielding plate. It is gradually shielded at 534.

  The left drive motor 561 stops when it rotates by a preset rotation angle with the position where the detection piece 546 is detected by the detection means 547 as the origin, and at this time, the rear left shielding plate 536 of the left shutter member 532 is stopped. The right end edge of the display space 501 arrives at the center of the display space 501 in the left-right direction, and the left half of the display space 501 is shielded. Similarly, the right drive motor 563 stops when it rotates by a preset rotation angle with the position where the detection means 547 has detected the detection piece 546 as the origin, and at this time, the right shutter member 533 has a rear right The left edge of the shielding plate 539 arrives at the center of the display space 501 in the left-right direction, and the right half of the display space 501 is shielded. Then, when the opposing side edges of the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 and the abutting surfaces 552 and 555 come into contact with each other at the center in the left and right direction of the display space 501, the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 are provided. Further, the permanent magnets 553 and 556 are magnetized, whereby the side edge and the contact surfaces 552 and 555 are held in contact (see FIG. 51). It should be noted that the rotation angle set to move the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 toward the shielding position in the left and right drive motors 561 and 563 ensures that the side edges of the left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 are in contact with each other. Each side edge is set so as to move slightly from the center in the left-right direction to the other region so as to be in contact with each other. Further, the force of the drive motors 561 and 563 for moving the left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 toward the other region while the side edges of the left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 are in contact with each other in the center in the left and right direction 539 and the left and right actuating members 560 and 562 are configured so as not to be overloaded by a clearance or the like set at a connecting portion.

  At the shielding position of the left shutter member 532, as described above, the three left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 are connected to each other in the left-right direction with no gap therebetween, and the left end portion of the front left shielding plate 534 is the left shutter. There is no gap between the storage member 507 and the rear side. Similarly, at the shielding position of the right shutter member 533, the three right shielding plates 537, 538, and 539 are connected in the left-right direction with no gap therebetween, and the right end of the front right shielding plate 537 is housed in the right shutter. A gap is not formed on the rear side of the member 508. Accordingly, the display space 501 is entirely shielded at the shielding positions of the left and right shutter members 532 and 533, and entirely covers the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 facing the back side of the opening 52a in the back unit 50. Can do.

  The lower wall of the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586 and the upper wall 589 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 disposed on the base frame 502 are arranged in front of each other when the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are positioned at the shielding positions. It is formed in a staircase shape corresponding to the staircase shape formed on the front side of each of the rear shielding plates 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, and 539. Therefore, when the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 are positioned at the shielding position, the lower rail member 506 and the lower rail member 506 are positioned on the front side of the left and right shielding plates 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, and 539. The upper surface of the guide part 519 is almost covered with the upper and lower arc-shaped decorative bodies 586 and 588 and cannot be seen directly. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a decrease in appearance when the display space 501 is shielded by the left and right shutter members 532 and 533.

(About magnets)
As described above, in the shutter device 500 according to the embodiment, the rear left shielding plate 536 of the left shutter member 532 and the rear right shielding plate 539 of the right shutter member 533 are opened by driving the left and right drive motors 561 and 563. The permanent magnets 553 and 556 provided on the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 are magnetically attached when the side edges and the contact surfaces 552 and 555 come into contact with each other. The side edge and the contact surfaces 552 and 555 are held in contact. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 from being separated by the repulsive force generated when the rear left shielding plate 536 and the rear right shielding plate 539 come into contact with each other when the left and right driving motors 561 and 563 are driven. That is, it is possible to prevent an unnatural gap between the rear left shielding plate 536 and the rear right shielding plate 539, and the decoration applied to the six shielding plates 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, 539. One picture constituted by can be displayed neatly. Further, since no gap is generated at the center in the left-right direction in the display space 501 at the shielding positions of the left and right shutter members 532 and 533, an unintended effect is generated from the gap in relation to the effect on the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19. The visual effect does not cause a decrease in production.

  In the embodiment, the transparent synthetic resin shielding plates 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, and 539 that shield the display space 501 with the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 facing the shielding position. Is not decorated, and a symbol combination game played on the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 can be visually recognized from the player side through a portion that is not decorated. That is, even when the display space 501 is shielded by the left and right shutter members 532 and 533, the effect performed on the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 can be enjoyed. On the other hand, in the rear left shielding plate 536 and the rear right shielding plate 539, since the front surfaces corresponding to the permanent magnets 553 and 556 and the fixing members 554 and 557 are decorated, the permanent is not directly related to the game effect. The magnets 553 and 556 and the fixing members 554 and 557 are not visually recognized from the player side, and the design of the shutter device 500 can be prevented from being deteriorated.

(Detection piece)
The detection piece 546 of the rear left shielding plate 536 detected by the left detection means 547 is provided so as to extend to the left at the lower part of the left edge of the rear left shielding plate 536 as shown in FIG. The detection piece 546 faces the back side of the portion where the decoration of the middle left shielding plate 535 adjacent to the left side is provided at the shielding position. In other words, the detection piece 546 provided on the rear left shielding plate 536 is always hidden by the middle left shielding plate 535 located on the front side while the rear left shielding plate 536 moves between the shielding position and the open position. Therefore, the detection piece 546 that is not directly related to the game effect is not visually recognized from the player side, and not only the design property at the shielding position of the left shutter member 532 but also when the left shutter member 532 is operated. There is no decline in designability. Since the detection piece 546 of the right shutter member 533 is also symmetrical with the detection piece 546 of the left shutter member 532, the detection piece 546 provided on the rear right shielding plate 539 has the rear right shielding plate 539. While moving between the shielded position and the open position, the right shutter member is always hidden from the middle right shielding plate 538 located on the front side and the detection piece 546 not directly related to the game effect is not visually recognized from the player side. Not only the design property at the shielding position of 533 but also the design property when the right shutter member 533 is operated does not deteriorate.

(Operating means)
In the shutter device 500, the left actuating member 560 that is swung by the drive of the left drive motor 561 is connected to the middle of the rear left shielding plate 536 in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. The load applied to the left drive motor 561 when the other two left shielding plates 534 and 535 are moved via the plate 536 can be reduced. That is, even when a large left shielding plate is used to open and close the large display space 501 with the increase in the size of the symbol display device 19, the left shielding plate 534, 535, 536 is used as the left drive motor 561 with a small output. It is possible to move the symbol display device 19 at a low cost. Further, since the upper and lower ends of the left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 are guided by the upper and lower rail grooves 513, 522, 514, 523, 515, 524, the left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 can be moved stably. And the left shutter member 532 can be opened and closed smoothly. Furthermore, since the roll bearings 540 are disposed at the four corners of each of the left shielding plates 534, 535, 536, the contact resistance between the left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 and the upper and lower rail members 505, 506 is reduced. The load applied to the left drive motor 561 can be further reduced, and the smooth movement of the left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the left actuating member 560 that moves the left shutter member 532 is parallel to the rear left shielding plate 536 that faces between the connecting portion with the rear left shielding plate 536 and the pivot portion by the pivot 564. Since the connecting arm portion 566 is supported while being sandwiched between the front and rear guide members 577 and 578 provided on the lower rail member 506, the left operating member 560 can be stably swung, Smoother opening and closing of the shutter member 532 can be achieved. In addition, the left actuating member 560 is slidably in contact with the front flange 572 provided on the rear left shielding plate 536 only at the projecting portion 570 projecting from the left actuating member 560 at the connecting portion with the rear left shielding plate 536. The guide members 577 and 578 are configured such that the ribs 579 and 582 are in sliding contact with the flat surface, so that the contact area between the left operating member 560 and the rear left shielding plate 536 is small, and the frictional resistance of the both 560 and 536 is kept small. Thus, it is possible to contribute to the smooth movement of the left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 and to further reduce the load applied to the left drive motor 561. The rear end of the front rib 579 of the front guide member 577 that supports the front surface of the left operating member 560 extends slightly rearward from the back surface of the guide portion 519 in the lower rail member 506. Is prevented from increasing in resistance due to contact with the guide portion 519.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the left actuating member 560 is located behind the rear left shielding plate 536 and the middle left shielding plate 535 at the shielding position of the left shutter member 532, and is located on the left side of both left shielding plates 536 and 535. The portion facing the front side of the actuating member 560 is decorated, and the left actuating member 560 is configured not to be visually recognized from the player side, so that the design at the shielding position of the left shutter member 532 is reduced. Absent. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the left actuating member 560 is located at the rear side of the rear left shielding plate 536 in the open position of the left shutter member 532 and the portion facing the front side of the left actuating member 560 in the rear shielding plate 536. Is decorated so that the left actuating member 560 is not visible from the player side, so that the design at the open position of the left shutter member 532 is not deteriorated. Furthermore, since the left actuating member 560 is formed in a shape that is always hidden behind the left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 even while the left shutter member 532 is moved between the shielding position and the open position, When the left shutter member 532 is actuated, the left actuating member 560 is prevented from being exposed to the player side to deteriorate the appearance. That is, since the left operating member 560 is always hidden behind the left shutter member 532, it is not necessary to provide various decorations for improving the appearance of the left operating member 560 for moving the left shutter member 532. Further, the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the design property is not lowered. Note that the right actuating member 562 that moves the right shutter member 533 is also always the same as the right actuating member 560, regardless of whether the right shutter member 533 is moved in the shielding position, the open position, or both positions. , 538, 539 so that the right actuating member 562 is not exposed to the player side and the appearance is not deteriorated.

(About transparent protective plate)
The transparent protective plate 609 inserts a plurality of the positioning protrusions 610 provided at both left and right end portions into the corresponding insertion holes 528c formed in the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508, respectively. The protection plate 609 is temporarily positioned with both left and right end portions in contact with the front surfaces of the step surfaces 528a and 528a of the step portions 528 and 528 (see FIGS. 64, 65, and 66). In this state, the screws inserted into the through holes 610a facing the positions facing the back side of the front plate of the shutter housing members 507 and 508 in the positioning protrusions 610 are screwed into the screw holes of the protective plate boss 529, thereby transparent. The protection plate 609 is fixed between the shutter storage members 507 and 508. That is, the transparent protective plate 609 that faces between the through-hole 31a of the transparent plate 31 and the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 and protects the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 from the pachinko ball is a base that constitutes the shutter device 500. Since it is disposed in the frame body 502, it is not necessary to form means for positioning and fixing the transparent protective plate 609 on the transparent plate 31, and the configuration of the transparent plate 31 can be simplified. Further, since the transparent protective plate 609 does not need to have a complicated shape that does not interfere with various parts, the structure is simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The transparent protective plate 609 is disposed in contact with the step surfaces 528a and 528a that are one step lower than the front surfaces of the left and right shutter storage members 507 and 508, and is disposed in front of the left and right shutter storage members 507 and 508. It does not protrude forward from the front surface of the plates 525, 525. Therefore, when the transparent plate 31 is disposed on the back unit 50, the frame-shaped decorative body 200 disposed on the transparent plate 31 and facing the front side of the shutter member 503 causes interference with the transparent protective plate 609. It is not necessary to perform a process for avoiding the manufacturing cost, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, in order to prevent interference between the frame-shaped decorative body 200 and the transparent protective plate 609, it is not necessary to separate the transparent plate 31 and the shutter device 500, and an increase in the longitudinal dimension of the game board 30 can be suppressed. .

  In addition, in the embodiment, the shutter member 503 that shields and opens the display space 501 of the shutter device 500 includes the three left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536, and the left shutter that shields and opens the left half of the display space 501. Since each of the shutter members 532 and 533 is composed of a member 532 and a right shutter member 533 that is composed of three right shielding plates 537, 538, and 539 and shields and opens the right half of the display space 501. The front-rear dimension when the left shielding plates 534, 535, 536 and the three right shielding plates 537, 538, 539 are stacked in the front-rear direction can be reduced. That is, the front and rear dimensions of the storage space of the left shutter storage member 507 in which the three left shielding plates 534, 535, and 536 that are overlapped in the front-rear direction are stored in the open position, and the three that are overlapped in the front-rear direction The front and rear dimensions of the storage space of the right shutter storage member 508 in which the right shielding plates 537, 538, and 539 are stored in the open position can be reduced. Therefore, even if the step portions 528 and 528 for preventing the transparent protective plate 609 from projecting forward are formed on the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508, the front and rear dimensions of the shutter housing members 507 and 508 can be kept small. It becomes.

  Further, the first inner peripheral wall 230 constituting the left and right side rear end portions of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 in a state where the transparent plate 31 is disposed with respect to the back unit 50 on which the shutter device 500 is disposed. The ball passage portion 274 is housed in the step portions 528 and 528 of the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508. That is, by using the step portions 528 and 528 for preventing the transparent protective plate 609 from projecting forward, the first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274 projecting from the back surface of the transparent plate 31 are accommodated, whereby the shutter accommodating member. 507, 508 (base frame 502) itself does not need to be retracted so as not to interfere with the first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274, and shutter storage members 507, 508 (base frame body) located on the back side of the transparent plate 31 are not required. The rearward projecting dimension of 502) can be suppressed. Further, in the embodiment, the left and right end portions of the transparent protective plate 609 in contact with the step surfaces 528a and 528a of the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508 have shapes corresponding to the first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274. Since the notch recesses 611 and 611 are formed (see FIG. 49), the first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274 can face the rear side without interfering with the transparent protective plate 609. Moreover, since the step portions 528 and 528 of the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508 function to attach the transparent protective plate 609, the first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274 of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 are arranged. It is not necessary to separately form a portion to be accommodated, and manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

  The first inner peripheral wall 230 and the ball passage portion 274 housed in the step portions 528 and 528 of the left and right shutter housing members 507 and 508 are subjected to a light diffusion process, so that the side walls of the step portions 528 are provided. 528b is difficult to see through the frame-shaped decorative body 200, and it is prevented that the designability is deteriorated.

(Relationship between upper lighting effect device and shutter device)
The lower part of the upper light-emitting effect device 302 that hangs down from the upper inner edge that defines the window 200a in the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is formed through the notch 587 formed in the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586 in the shutter device 500. It extends into the display space 501. That is, since the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 that shield and open the display space 501 overlap with the upper light emitting effect device 302 in the front-rear relationship (see FIG. 61), the effects of the operation of the shutter members 532 and 533 The effect by the light emission of the upper light emitting effect device 302 can be performed in a state of being overlapped in the front and back, and the overall effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, since the upper light emitting effect device 302 is not movable, the processing of the wiring for controlling the LEDs 342 and 344 and supplying power is simple, and the effect can be enhanced without complicating the structure.

  In addition, as described above, a part of the upper light emitting effect device 302 faces the notch 587 of the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586, and therefore the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 and the upper light emission effect device 302 are arranged in the front and back. The front-rear dimensions required for installation can be reduced, which can contribute to the thinning of the game board 30 (pachinko machine 10). In addition, the cutout portion 587 of the upper arc-shaped decorative body 586 is a position where the rear left shielding plate 536 and the rear right shielding plate 539 located at the rearmost part of the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 come into contact with each other at the center in the left-right direction of the display space 501. Therefore, the notch 587 can be provided behind the positions of the front left and right shielding plates 534 and 537 and the middle left and right shielding plates 535 and 538. That is, the upper light emitting effect device 302 can be positioned further rearward without obstructing the shielding of the display space 501 by the left and right shutter members 532 and 533, and the shutter members 532 and 533 and the upper light emitting effect device 302 are provided. Therefore, it becomes possible to further reduce the front-rear dimensions required.

  The transparent protective plate 609 facing the position where the upper light emitting effect device 302 overlaps with the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 is formed with a concave portion 612 having a shape substantially following the outer shape of the upper light emitting effect device 302. The upper light emitting effect device 302 faces the front side of the recess 612 (see FIG. 61). That is, the transparent protective plate 609 positioned on the front side of the left and right shutter members 532 and 533 does not become an obstacle for disposing the upper light emitting effect device 302 rearward. Further, since the entire lower back side of the upper light emitting effect device 302 is not blocked by the transparent protective plate 609 due to the presence of the recess 612, the upper light emitting effect is provided between the upper light emitting effect device 302 and the transparent protective plate 609. Heat generated from the device 302 is not accumulated, and the transparent protective plate 609 can be prevented from being affected by heat.

(Relationship between drive motor and start prize device)
In the shutter device 500, as described above, the shutter member 503 that shields and opens the display space 501, the left shutter member 532 that shields and opens the left half of the display space 501, and the right half of the display space 501 are shielded and opened. The left drive motor 561 and the right drive motor 563 for moving the shutter members 532 and 533 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the start winning device 38 positioned below the frame-shaped decorative body 200. It is. In other words, since it is not necessary to dispose the drive motors 561 and 563 behind the start winning device 38 in order to avoid interference with the start winning device 38, the drive motors 561 and 563 disposed in the base frame 502 are arranged. The rearward protrusion dimension can be reduced. In addition, the drive motors 561 and 563 are disposed in a rearward posture with the output shaft directed rearward with respect to the mounting plate portion 520 of the base frame body 502, and the main body portion is a predetermined length from the front surface of the mounting plate portion 520. Projects forward. The portions of the drive motors 561 and 563 that protrude forward from the mounting plate portion 520 overlap the portion that protrudes rearward from the transparent plate 31 in the start winning device 38 in a side view, and is transparent. The board 31 and the back unit 50 can be disposed close to each other, which can contribute to the thinning of the pachinko machine. Since the drive motors 561 and 563 of the shutter device 500 are arranged below the display space 501, the total degree of freedom for the upper portion of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is increased. That is, it is not necessary to consider the arrangement of other movable bodies and light-emitting effect devices in consideration of the arrangement of the operating means 504 of the shutter device 500 in the upper part of the frame-shaped decorative body 200 that the player pays attention to. It is possible to arrange a movable body and a light emitting effect device so that a realistic effect can be obtained.

  Since the left and right actuating members 560 and 562 connected to the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 and swung by the left and right drive motors 561 and 563 are formed in a plate shape, the base frame body of the actuating members is formed. The projecting dimension from the rear to the rear is kept small (see FIG. 60). That is, since the rearward projecting dimensions of the left and right actuating members 560 and 562 facing the rear of the stage portion 271 can be suppressed, the front and rear dimensions of the shutter device 500 itself can also be decreased. Further, the left and right drive motors 561 and 563 and the left and right actuating members 560 and 562 are configured to engage the drive gear 576 and the driven gear 565 to transmit power, so that the front-rear dimensions of the power transmission unit are as follows. Can be kept small. Further, the left and right actuating members 560 and 562 are arranged such that the pivot arm portion 567 pivotally supported by the pivot shaft 564 is displaced rearward relative to the connecting arm portion 566 facing the rear side of the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539. Since they are connected (see FIG. 62), the connecting arm portion 566 is brought close to the rear left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 regardless of the meshing position of the driven gear 565 and the driving gear 576 of the pivot arm portion 567. It can arrange | position and can make the protrusion dimension of the connecting arm part 566 to the back from the left and right shielding plates 536 and 539 located in the last part small. That is, the distance between the display surface 19a of the symbol display device 19 facing the rear of the display space 501 in the base frame 502 and the shutter member 503 can be reduced, which contributes to reducing the longitudinal dimension of the game board itself. obtain.

(Attaching the lower arc-shaped decorative body to the lower rail member)
A front lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 formed in an arc shape having the same curvature as the guide portion 519 of the lower rail member 506 is fitted and assembled to the guide portion 519 from the front side. At this time, the left and right fixed legs 591 and 591 provided on the lower wall 590 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 are fitted into corresponding fitting recesses 592 and 592 provided on the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506, The lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is positioned with respect to the lower rail member 506. Further, the pins 592a projecting from the respective fitting recesses 592 are inserted into the pin holes 591a of the corresponding fixed legs 591 so that the fixed legs 591, that is, the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 are accurately positioned with respect to the lower rail member 506. Determined by position. It should be noted that the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is also in contact with the lower rail member 506 by the plurality of second restricted portions 596 provided on the lower wall 590 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 coming into contact with the front surface of the mounting plate portion 520. Is positioned. And the screw | thread inserted from the front side to the through-hole 591b provided in each said fixing leg 591 is screwed in the screw hole 592b of a corresponding fitting recessed part 592, and the lower-arc-shaped decoration body 588 is with respect to the lower rail member 506. Fixed in the correct position. That is, in a state where the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is positioned and fixed with respect to the lower rail member 506, the first restricted portion 595 provided on the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 is engaged with the engagement as shown in FIGS. The piece 595a is housed in the housing portion 594 provided on the mounting plate portion 520 with the front side facing the front side.

  On the front surface of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588 in the mounting plate portion 520, the decorative LED board 607 has connector receiving portions on both sides of the first positioning recess 593 formed in the center in the left-right direction. It is positioned and fixed in a state where it is inserted through the corresponding connector insertion port 608 from the front side.

(Attaching the decorative member to the lower rail member)
The decorative member 597 fits the fitting protrusion 604 into the first positioning recess 593 of the mounting plate portion 520 from the front side, and the fixing plate portions 601 provided on the left and right sides of the decorative member 597. By inserting the corresponding decorative pins 602 and decorative bosses 603 provided on the mounting plate portion 520 into the pin holes 601a and the through holes 601b, the decorative member 597 is placed on the front surface of the mounting plate portion 520 with the decorative LED. The substrate 607 is positioned in a state where it is accommodated. At this time, even if each of the plurality of positioning notches 599a formed on the upper wall 599 of the decorative member 597 is engaged with the corresponding second regulated portion 596 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588, the decorative member The movement of 597 in the left-right direction is restricted. That is, in a state where the fitting protrusion 604 is fitted in the first positioning recess 593, the decorative pin 602 and the decorative boss 603 corresponding to the pin hole 601a and the through hole 601b of the left and right fixing plate portions 601 are inserted. By engaging each of the plurality of positioning notches 599a formed separately in the left-right direction with the corresponding second regulated portion 596, the decorative member 597 is attached to the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506. It is positioned accurately without being displaced in the left-right direction.

  Further, in a state where the fitting protrusion 604 is fitted in the first positioning recess 593, the restriction piece 604a provided on the decorative member 597 is, as shown in FIG. 63, the first restricted object of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588. The downward movement of the decorative member 597 is restricted by engaging with the upper side of the engagement piece 595a in the portion 595. Furthermore, the upward movement of the decoration member 597 is also restricted by the upper wall 599 of the decoration member 597 being substantially in contact with the lower wall 590 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588. That is, the decorative member 597 is fitted to the fitting projection 604 and the first positioning recess 593 with respect to the mounting plate portion 520 of the lower rail member 506, the pin hole 601a and the through hole 601b, the decorative pin 602 and the decorative member. By insertion with the boss 603, engagement between the restriction piece 604a and the first restricted portion 595 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588, engagement between the positioning notch 599a and the second restricted portion 596 of the lower arc-shaped decorative body 588. Thus, the positioning is ensured without any positional deviation in any of the vertical and horizontal directions. Then, the second left side LED board 123 of the left side light emitting decoration device 120 and the second right side LED board 148 of the right side light emission decoration device 145 are arranged on the front side of the mounting board 520, and both the LED boards 123, 148 are arranged. The decorative member 597 is mounted on both the left and right sides by screwing the screws inserted from the front side into the through holes provided at the positions overlapping the front sides of the fixed plate portions 601 and 601 in the screw holes of the corresponding decorative bosses 603 and 603. It is fixed to the mounting platen portion 520 via the side LED substrates 123 and 148.

(Regarding positioning of decorative member and stage)
By disposing the transparent plate 31 in which the frame-shaped decorative body 200 is disposed in the back unit 50, the passage forming portion 288 provided in the stage portion 271 is provided with the second positioning recess 605 of the decoration member 597. Fit from the front side. In addition, the positioning bosses 273 and 273 provided on the left and right sides of the stage portion 271 sandwiching the passage forming portion 288 are inserted into the positioning insertion holes 606 and 606 of the decoration member 597 from the front side, so that the stage portion 271 and the decoration member are disposed. Positioning relative to 597 is made. As described above, since the decorative member 597 is accurately positioned with respect to the base frame body 502 (lower rail member 506) of the shutter device 500 disposed in the back unit 50, the decorative member 597 is provided on the decorative member 597. The second positioning recess 605 is also located at an accurate position (center in the left-right direction) with respect to the back unit 50. Accordingly, the passage forming portion 288 inserted into the second positioning recess 605 is also accurately positioned at the center in the left-right direction.

  The stage portion 271 disposed on the transparent plate 31 is passed through a ball passage portion 274 and an L-shaped passage (ball discharge passage) from a first stage (ball rolling portion) 269 through a stage port 287. The pachinko balls that have entered the vertical passage 289 of 291 are discharged to the gaming area 32 through the ball outlet 250. In this case, since the passage forming portion 288 that defines the vertical passage 289 is positioned at the center in the left-right direction via the decorative member 597 as described above, the pachinko sphere discharged from the ball outlet 250 is transparent. A pachinko that is discharged directly above the upper start winning port 40a of the start winning device 38 disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the plate 31 and discharged from the ball outlet 250 of the stage portion 271 to the start winning device 38. The ball can be won with a predetermined probability, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

(Example of change)
The configuration of the gaming machine is not limited to that of the embodiment, and various changes can be made.
(1) In the embodiment, the start winning device and the special winning device are arranged above the transparent plate out port (discharge port), and the wiring of both winning devices is formed on the transparent plate. However, it may be configured such that only one of the winning devices is provided above the out port (discharge port).
(2) In the embodiment, the wiring insertion port for leading the wiring of the production unit provided on the upper part of the transparent plate to the back side of the back unit is formed to open in the front and back, but the upper and front and back of the back unit (box-shaped main body) It is also possible to form a notch opening at the top of the back unit so that the wiring of the effect unit is led out to the back side of the back unit.
(3) In the embodiment, an effect unit including an upper light emitting effect device and a movable effect device is adopted as an electrical component located above the transparent plate. However, the light effect effect device and the movable effect device are provided alone. Alternatively, a winning device may be provided on the upper part of the transparent plate to provide an electrical component. Of course, the configurations of the light emitting effect device and the movable effect device provided on the upper part of the transparent plate are not limited to those of the embodiments.
(4) In the embodiment, although one lighting window portion that continuously opens from the upper wall portion to the upper fixing portion of the box-shaped main body of the back unit is formed, the upper fixing portion from the upper wall portion is formed. It is also possible to form a plurality of illumination windows that continuously open over the entire area. Further, the shape and size of the illumination window are not limited to those in the embodiment, and can be arbitrarily changed.
(5) In the embodiment, the decorative cover of the light emitting decorative device is composed of two members, a transparent mounting base and a light transmissive cover main body. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single member may be used.
(6) In the embodiment, a plurality of light emitting effect devices are arranged in the back unit so as to surround the outer periphery of the shutter device. However, the outer periphery of the shutter device may be surrounded by a single light emitting decoration device. Is possible. That is, in this case, the outer periphery of the shutter device is surrounded by a single light emitter substrate (LED substrate), and the front side of the light emitter substrate is covered with a single decorative cover. Further, the shutter device may be omitted, and a light emitting effect device may be provided along the opening edge of the opening of the back unit (opposing surface portion) to surround the opening.
(7) In the embodiment, the left and right transparent panels are provided so as to surround substantially the entire circumference of the opening (the through hole of the transparent plate) formed in the opposing surface portion of the back unit. Thus, substantially the entire periphery of the opening (the through hole of the transparent plate) formed in the facing surface portion may be surrounded. It is also possible to provide a plurality of the transparent panels, and to surround substantially the entire circumference of the opening (the through hole of the transparent plate) formed in the facing surface portion.
(8) In the embodiment, the light is irradiated from the left and right side end faces of the transparent panel, but the light may be irradiated from the upper and lower end faces of the transparent panel.
(9) In the embodiment, the transparent panel is separated from the back side of the transparent plate by the thickness of the shielding part constituting the shielding member of the side light emitting effect device. The transparent panel can also be arranged so as to be parallel to the back surface of the transparent plate so as to be positioned completely flush with the front end of the opening of each image wall.
(10) In the embodiment, the front side of the light emitting decoration device arranged in the box-shaped main body of the back unit is covered with the transparent panel of the side light emitting effect device. It may be omitted and the decorative cover of the light emitting decorative device may be opposed to the back surface of the transparent plate. Similarly, in the embodiment, the configuration in which the light emitting decoration device for illuminating the transparent plate from the back side by light emission is arranged on the back side of the transparent panel of the side light emitting effect device, but the back side of the transparent panel is movable. You may comprise so that the movable production | presentation apparatus provided with the body may be arrange | positioned.
(11) In the embodiment, the left and right shutter members are each configured by three shielding plates. However, the number of the shielding plates is not limited to three, and depends on the size of the display space. Can be set appropriately.
(12) In the embodiment, a part of the transparent synthetic resin shielding plate is decorated so that a part of the display unit of the symbol display device can be seen through the shielding plate even when the entire display space is shielded. However, the display part of the symbol display device may be completely hidden when the entire shielding space is covered by decorating the entire shielding plate.
(13) In the embodiment, the shutter member that shields and opens the display space includes the left shutter member that shields and opens the left half of the display space, and the right shutter member that shields and opens the right half of the display space. However, it is possible to employ a configuration in which the entire display space is shielded and opened by one shutter member. In other words, the operating shielding plate at the rearmost position in the open position stored in the storage space of the shutter storage member positioned on the left or right side of the base frame body is moved so as to be pulled out to the right or left side by the operating means. The entire space is shielded, and the entire display space is opened by moving in the opposite direction.
(14) In the embodiment, the ball bearing is adopted as the rotating body disposed on the shielding plate. However, a roller may be used as long as it rolls in contact with the rail member.
(15) In the embodiment, the permanent magnets are respectively disposed on the rear left and right shielding plates so that the permanent magnets are magnetically attached to each other when the rear left and right shielding plates come into contact with each other. A magnet may be disposed on the plate side, and a magnetized member capable of magnetizing the magnet may be disposed on the other shielding plate side. For example, the magnetized member is made of a metal such as iron, cobalt, nickel, or a ferromagnetic material such as iron oxide, and the side edges and contact surfaces of the left and right shielding plates after the operation means are operated. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the magnet is magnetically attached to the magnetic attachment member when abutting.
(16) Regarding the operation of both shutter members in the shutter device of the embodiment that shields and opens the display space with the left and right shutter members, both shutter members are moved simultaneously, or each shutter member is moved alone, etc. It can be set according to the contents of the symbol combination game performed on the display unit of the symbol display device.
(17) In the embodiment, the upper arc-shaped decorative body is disposed on the front side of the upper rail member, and the upper arc-shaped decorative body is described as having the cutout portion where a part of the upper light emitting effect device faces. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the body is omitted and the notch portion is formed in the upper rail member itself provided with the required decoration.
(18) In the embodiment, the lower arc-shaped decorative body is disposed on the lower rail member, and the lower arc-shaped decorative body is described in the case where the first regulated portion that engages with the regulating piece of the decorative member is provided. A configuration in which the lower arc-shaped decorative body is omitted and the first restricted portion is formed on the lower rail member itself may be employed. In addition, as the first restricted portion, if the restriction piece can be detachably engaged, a through hole into which the restriction piece can be inserted and removed is formed instead of the engagement piece of the embodiment. Also good.
(19) Although the embodiment has been described in the case where two ribs are provided on the front and rear guide members that support the operating member, the number of the ribs may be one or three or more.
(20) The disposition positions of the closing engagement pieces and the opening engagement pieces provided on the respective shielding plates constituting the shutter member are not limited to the positions in the embodiment, and the movement of the operating shielding plate is performed. Accordingly, it is only necessary that the engagement pieces for closing or opening other shielding plates are sequentially engaged. The closing engagement piece and the opening engagement piece are preferably provided so that they cannot be seen from the front side.
(21) In the embodiment, the upper light-emitting effect device includes a light passage member and a circular transparent panel, and performs a light-emitting effect using light characters and a light-emitting effect using reflected light from the circular transparent panel. However, the upper light emitting effect device is not necessarily provided with both the light passing member and the circular transparent panel, and it is not necessary to perform two kinds of light emitting effects, and may be configured to perform one of the light emitting effects. For example, in the case of a configuration including only a circular transparent panel, it is not necessary to provide a light passage member or a first light emitting means if the panel is held in an appropriate posture within the disk-shaped base member. In the embodiment, the circular pattern is configured by the unevenness provided on the entire rear surface of the pattern provided on the rear surface of the circular transparent panel. However, the design may be a character, figure, character, or the like. Further, the shape of the circular transparent panel itself may be formed into, for example, a star shape, and the light of the shape may be projected onto the effect cover member. In the embodiment, the light reflecting sheet is sandwiched between the circular transparent panel and the holding substrate, but the light reflecting sheet is not necessarily provided.
(22) In the embodiment, the case where four panel LEDs are provided is illustrated, but the number of panel LEDs may be appropriately increased or decreased. Even when the number of panel LEDs is changed, it is preferable to install the panel LEDs at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with respect to the circular transparent panel in order to reflect light in a balanced manner on the circular transparent panel. is there. Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of receiving holes for the light passage member are provided to represent the multi-line character “heaven”. However, the plurality of receiving holes represent a symbol other than characters or the like, or a single receiving hole. A single character or design may be represented by. For simple characters such as a single stroke, it is possible to provide only a light passage hole in the light passage member and omit the light guide wall.
(23) In the embodiment, the upper light emitting effect device is attached to the effect device fixing portion of the attachment base by the three base fixing bosses of the disk-shaped base member, but three or more base fixing bosses may be provided. In the embodiment, the base fixing boss is provided biased to the upper side of the rear surface of the disk-shaped base member. However, the base fixing boss may be installed at the center of the rear surface. In the embodiment, the effect unit is composed of the upper light emitting effect device and the two movable effect devices. However, the effect unit is composed of only the upper light effect effect device or includes one or more movable effect devices. Also good.
(24) In the embodiment, the case where the first wiring passage and the second wiring passage are provided in the frame-shaped decorative body is shown, but one wiring passage may be provided in the frame-shaped decorative body. In the embodiment, the second wiring passage is defined by the upper outer peripheral wall and the second inner peripheral wall (central inner peripheral wall) by assembling the rear frame member and the front frame member. The second wiring passage may be directly formed on the frame member or the front frame member. In the embodiment, the second wiring passage is inserted and guided to the center upper position (first notch) of the upper frame, but for example, the wiring of the sphere detection sensor is sent to the right side of the upper frame You may make it go to. It is also possible to provide a wiring passage in the lower frame. In the embodiment, the upper decorative cover that is attached to the front frame member is employed as the covering portion that covers the second wiring passage. For example, the outer extension portion 232 of the front frame member is made opaque so that the outer extending portion is covered. The protruding portion may function as a covering portion.
(25) In the embodiment, a pachinko machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various conventionally known gaming machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a pinball machine can be adopted. Further, the symbol display device is not limited to the one using the liquid crystal panel, and a drum type, a belt type, and other types of symbol display devices can also be employed.

19 Symbol display device 19a Display surface (display unit)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 30 Game board 31 Transparent board 31a Through-hole 32 Game area 50 Back unit 52a Opening part 230 1st inner peripheral wall (side rear end part)
274 Ball passage (side rear end)
501 Display space 502 Base frame 503 Shutter member 504 Actuating means 505 Upper rail member 506 Lower rail member 507 Left shutter housing member 508 Right shutter housing member 513 Front upper rail groove 514 Middle upper rail groove 515 Rear upper rail groove 522 Front lower rail Groove 523 Middle lower rail groove 524 Rear lower rail groove 528 Step portion 528a Step surface 528b Side wall 528c Insertion hole 532 Left shutter member 533 Right shutter member 534 Front left shielding plate 535 Middle left shielding plate 536 Rear left shielding plate 537 Front right shielding plate 538 Middle right shielding plate 539 Rear right shielding plate 558 Left actuation means 559 Right actuation means 609 Transparent protective plate 610 Positioning projection

Claims (4)

A game board having a transparent board provided with a game area on the front side and a back unit attached to the back side of the transparent board is provided, and a symbol display device capable of variably displaying various symbols is arranged on the back side of the back unit. In addition, in the gaming machine configured to be able to visually recognize the display portion of the symbol display device from the front side through the opening formed in the back unit and the through-hole formed in the transparent plate,
A base frame that is disposed in the back unit and that defines a display space that faces between the opening of the back unit and the through-hole of the transparent plate and allows the display unit of the symbol display device to be viewed from the front side. Body,
Upper and lower rail members that constitute upper and lower frame portions in the base frame body, and rail grooves extending in the left-right direction are respectively formed on opposing surfaces that are vertically opposed across the display space;
A shutter member disposed on the base frame body so as to be movable along the upper and lower rail grooves, and capable of shielding the display space;
An operating means for moving the shutter member between a shielding position for shielding the display space and an open position for opening the display space;
A shutter housing member that configures left and right frame portions in the base frame body, and that houses at least one shutter member moved to the open position on the rear side;
A stepped portion formed of a stepped surface formed on the display space side on the front surface of the shutter housing members and lowered one step rearward, and a side wall rising along an edge separated from the display space on the stepped surface;
A plurality of insertion holes formed in the side wall of the step;
A transparent protective plate that is disposed so that both ends abut against the front side of both step surfaces of the shutter housing member and covers the display space from the front side;
It is formed at the left and right ends of the transparent protective plate, and is formed of positioning protrusions that are inserted in the insertion hole so as to be detachable and position the transparent protective plate between both shutter housing members,
A gaming machine, wherein a transparent protective plate is detachably fixed to a shutter housing member through the positioning protrusion. The shutter member is
It consists of a plurality of left shielding plates that can partially shield the display space, and can shield the left half of the display space in a state where the plurality of left shielding plates are connected to the left and right, and the plurality of left shielding plates A left shutter member capable of opening the display space in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction;
It consists of a plurality of right shielding plates that can partially shield the display space, and shields the right half of the display space in a state where the plurality of right shielding plates are connected to the left and right, and the plurality of right shielding plates are in the front-rear direction. And a right shutter member that opens the display space in a state of overlapping with
The operating means is
Left actuating means for moving the left shutter member between an open position housed on the rear side of the left shutter housing member and a shielding position shielding the left half of the display space;
The right actuating means for moving the right shutter member between an open position accommodated on the rear side of the right shutter accommodating member and a shielding position for shielding the right half of the display space. Gaming machine.   At the shielding position of the left and right shutter members, the left shielding plate located on the rightmost side of the left shutter member and the right shielding plate located on the leftmost side of the right shutter member are in contact with each other at the center in the left-right direction of the display space. The display of the symbol display device that covers the entire display portion of the symbol display device facing the back side of the opening portion of the back unit by both shutter members, and that faces the back side of the opening portion of the back unit at the open position of the left and right shutter members. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine is configured to open the entire portion.   The frame-shaped decorative body is disposed along the through-hole of the transparent plate, and left and right side rear end portions of the frame-shaped decorative body are stored in the stepped portion of the shutter storage member. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

Images